manualshive.com logo in svg

GE GA000100, Service Manual

The GE GA000100 Service Manual is a comprehensive instructional guide for troubleshooting and servicing the product. Download this essential manual for free from our website, providing detailed instructions and diagrams to assist you in maintaining and repairing the GE GA000100.

Share
Download
background image

GE H

EALTHCARE

D

IRECTION

 GA091568, R

EVISION

 

5

 

 

VIVID E9 S

ERVICE

 M

ANUAL

 - 

  xxv

CHAPTER  8

Replacement procedures

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 1

Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 1
Contents in this chapter   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 1

Warnings and important information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 2

Purpose of this section  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 2
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 2
Returning/Shipping probes and Repair Parts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 3
Manpower - When two persons are needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 3
Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 4

Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 5

Reloading the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 6

Purpose of this section  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 6
VIVID E9 models versus software requirement   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 7
Customer provided prerequisite  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 9
Tools provided with the VIVID E9 at delivery or after an upgrade   . . . . . . .  8 - 9
Data Management - moving all images   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 10
Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 10
Recording important settings and parameters  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 11
When to load or reload the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 12
Reloading the Software from Repository   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 13
Loading the Software - from DVD/CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 16
Setup after Software loading   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 37
Verifications after the software has been re-loaded  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 37

Replacing Covers and Bumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 38

Purpose of this section  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 38
Side Covers replacement  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 38
Top Cover replacement   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 41
Side Bumpers Replacement Procedure  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 44
Foot Rest Bumper replacement  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 45
Front Cover replacement   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 47
Plate Connectors w/Guide replacement  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 49
Filter Cover replacement   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 51
Rear Cover replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 52
Door, I/O Panel replacement   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 54
Cable Hooks replacement   . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  8 - 56

Summary of Contents for GA000100

Page 1: ...GE Healthcare OPERATING DOCUMENTATION VIVID E9 Service Manual Part Number GA091568 Revision 5 ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... L ANGLAIS C EST AU CLIENT QU IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE NE PAS TENTER D INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS LE NON RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN L OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES DIESES KUNDENDIENST HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE FAL...

Page 4: ... DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA ESTÁ DISPONÍVEL APENAS EM INGLÊS SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA QUE NÃO A GEHC SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO NÃO TENTE EFECTUAR REPARAÇÕES NO EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO PREVIAMENTE ESTE MANUAL A INOBSERVÂNCIA DESTE...

Page 5: ... VAHINGOITTUMINEN SÄHKÖISKUN MEKAANISEN VIAN TAI MUUN VAARATILANTEEN VUOKSI ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ ΙΟ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΙΑΤΙΘΕΤΑΙ ΣΤΑ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΑ ΜΟΝΟ ΕΑΝ ΤΟ ΑΤΟΜΟ ΠΑΡΟΧΗΣ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΕΝΟΣ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΑΠΑΙΤΕΙ ΤΟ ΠΑΡΟΝ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙ ΙΟ ΣΕ ΓΛΩΣΣΑ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΤΩΝ ΑΓΓΛΙΚΩΝ ΑΠΟΤΕΛΕΙ ΕΥΘΥΝΗ ΤΟΥ ΠΕΛΑΤΗ ΝΑ ΠΑΡΕΧΕΙ ΥΠΗΡΕΣΙΕΣ ΜΕΤΑΦΡΑΣΗΣ ΜΗΝ ΕΠΙΧΕΙΡΗΣΕΤΕ ΤΗΝ ΕΚΤΕΛΕΣΗ ΕΡΓΑΣΙΩΝ ΣΕΡΒΙΣ ΣΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ ΕΚΤΟΣ ΕΑΝ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΣΥΜΒΟΥΛΕΥΤΕΙ ΚΑΙ ΕΧΕΤΕ ΚΑΤΑΝΟΗΣΕΙ ΤΟ ...

Page 6: ...TOVATELE SLUŽEB OBSLUŽNÉHO PERSONÁLU NEBO PACIENTŮ VLIVEM ELEKTRICKÉHOP PROUDU RESPEKTIVE VLIVEM K RIZIKU MECHANICKÉHO POŠKOZENÍ NEBO JINÉMU RIZIKU DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END ENGELSK ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET MANGLEN...

Page 7: ...TI SUŽEISTAS DĖL ELEKTROS SMŪGIO MECHANINIŲ AR KITŲ PAVOJŲ DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT SERVICELEVERANDØREN OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ ...

Page 8: ...ЕЦИАЛИСТ ПО ТЕХОБСЛУЖИВАНИЮ ОПЕРАТОР ИЛИ ПАЦИЕНТ ПОЛУЧАТ УДАР ЗЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИМ ТОКОМ МЕХАНИЧЕСКУЮ ТРАВМУ ИЛИ ДРУГОЕ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЕ ТОВА СЕРВИЗНО РЪКОВОДСТВО Е НАЛИЧНО САМО НА АНГЛИЙСКИ ЕЗИК АКО ДОСТАВЧИКЪТ НА СЕРВИЗНИ УСЛУГИ НА КЛИЕНТ СЕ НУЖДАЕ ОТ ЕЗИК РАЗЛИЧЕН ОТ АНГЛИЙСКИ ЗАДЪЛЖЕНИЕ НА КЛИЕНТА Е ДА ПРЕДОСТАВИ ПРЕВОДАЧЕСКА УСЛУГА НЕ СЕ ОПИТВАЙТЕ ДА ИЗВЪРШВАТЕ СЕРВИЗНО ОБСЛУЖВАНЕ НА ТОВА ОБОРУДВАНЕ ОСВЕ...

Page 9: ...ZROČENE STRUJNIM UDAROM MEHANIČKIM I DRUGIM OPASNOSTIMA TÁTO SERVISNÁ PRÍRUČKA JE K DISPOZÍCII LEN V ANGLIČTINE AK ZÁKAZNÍKOV POSKYTOVATEĽ SLUŽIEB VYŽADUJE INÝ JAZYK AKO ANGLIČTINU POSKYTNUTIE PREKLADATEĽSKÝCH SLUŽIEB JE ZODPOVEDNOSŤOU ZÁKAZNÍKA NEPOKÚŠAJTE SA VYKONÁVAŤ SERVIS ZARIADENIA SKÔR AKO SI NEPREČÍTATE SERVISNÚ PRÍRUČKU A NEPOROZUMIETE JEJ ZANEDBANIE TOHTO UPOZORNENIA MÔŽE VYÚSTIŤ DO ZRAN...

Page 10: ...N İNGİLİZCE DIŞINDAKİ BİR DİLDE OLMASINI İSTERSE KILAVUZU TERCÜME ETTİRMEK MÜŞTERİNİN SORUMLULUĞUNDADIR SERVİS KILAVUZUNU OKUYUP ANLAMADAN EKİPMANLARA MÜDAHALE ETMEYİNİZ BU UYARININ GÖZ ARDI EDİLMESİ ELEKTRİK ÇARPMASI YA DA MEKANİK VEYA DİĞER TÜRDEN KAZALAR SONUCUNDA TEKNİSYENİN OPERATÖRÜN YA DA HASTANIN YARALANMASINA YOL AÇABİLİR DİKKAT TR JA Traditional Chinese ...

Page 11: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL ix ZH CN KO ...

Page 12: ...s All of GE s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel i e GE s field engineers personnel of third party service companies with equivalent training or licensed electricians to perform electrical servicing on the equipment OMISSIONS ERRORS If there are any omissions err...

Page 13: ... any form in whole or in part without prior written permission of GE Healthcare GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice TRADEMARKS All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders COPYRIGHTS All Material Copyright 2008 2010 2012 by General Electric Company Inc All Rights Reserved ...

Page 14: ...30 Updated per BT10 release 3 2011 MAR 01 Updated per BT 11 M4 release of product 4 2011 SEP 19 Updated per BT 12 release 5 2012 DEC 10 Updated with changes since Rev 4 Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision Title Page 5 4 1 to 4 54 5 9 1 to 9 106 5 i to xii 5 5 1 to 5 102 5 10 1 to 10 32 5 1 1 to 1 36 5 6 1 to 6 18 5 Back Cover N A 2 1 to 2 14 5 7 1 to 7 24 5 3 1 to 3 52 5 8 1 to 8 316 5 ...

Page 15: ...6 Standard hazard icons 1 7 Product icons 1 8 Safety considerations 1 11 Introduction 1 11 Human safety 1 11 Mechanical safety 1 13 Electrical safety 1 15 Labels locations 1 16 Label on Front of LCD Monitor 1 16 Label on Rear of LCD Monitor 1 16 Label on Upper OP Panel 1 17 Labels on Front Handle 1 17 Labels on top of Console 1 17 Labels near Connectors on Front 1 18 Labels on DVD Units 1 19 Label...

Page 16: ...e warnings 1 32 Lockout Tagout LOTO requirements 1 33 Returning Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 1 33 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC 1 34 What is EMC 1 34 Compliance 1 34 Electrostatic discharge ESD prevention 1 34 Customer assistance 1 35 Contact information 1 35 System manufacturer 1 36 ...

Page 17: ...2 2 Console environmental requirements 2 2 Electrical requirements 2 4 EMI limitations 2 7 Probes environmental requirements 2 8 Time and manpower requirements 2 8 Facility needs 2 9 Purchaser responsibilities 2 9 Required facility needs 2 10 Desirable features 2 11 Minimal floor plan suggestion 2 11 Suggested Floor Plan VIVID E9 and EchoPAC PC in Same Room 2 11 Networking setup requirements 2 12 ...

Page 18: ...from the Carton Box 3 12 Packing materials for the Wooden Box recycling information 3 16 Packing materials for the Carton Box recycling information 3 17 Preparing for setup 3 19 Verify Customer Order 3 19 Physical inspection 3 19 EMI protection 3 19 Completing the setup 3 20 Purpose of this section 3 20 System specifications 3 20 Electrical specifications 3 21 Connections on the External IO 3 22 C...

Page 19: ... 41 Introduction 3 41 Compatibility 3 41 Select TCP IP Screen 3 42 Changing the AE Title and or Port Number Port No 3 43 DHCP setup 3 44 Set the Remote Archive s Network Information 3 47 Save the New Settings 3 48 Options Setup 3 49 Software options 3 49 Color Video Printer optional installation 3 49 Setup paperwork 3 50 User s Manual s 3 50 Product Locator Installation Card 3 51 ...

Page 20: ... to VIVID E9 as ADM 4 15 Moving and Transporting the VIVID E9 4 17 Recording important settings and parameters 4 19 Cleaning the Trackball from the outside OP 5 4 31 Cleaning the Trackball OP 1 to OP 4 4 32 Functional checks 4 37 Preparation 4 37 2D Mode B mode Checks 4 37 M Mode Checks 4 39 Color Mode Checks 4 40 PW CW Doppler Mode Checks 4 42 Tissue Velocity Imaging TVI Checks 4 43 Probe Connect...

Page 21: ...f this section 5 9 Introduction 5 9 VIVID E9 general description 5 10 VIVID E9 block diagram 5 10 Signal flow overview 5 11 System configuration and software 5 12 The electronics 5 12 VIVID E9 interconnection diagram 5 13 VIVID E9 s Operating Modes 5 15 Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel 5 17 Top Console description 5 17 Operator Panel Control Panel 5 21 Main Console 5 24 Main Console...

Page 22: ...ption 5 55 BEP6 Face Top and Rear connections 5 56 BEP5 Face and Top connections 5 58 Input DC Voltages 5 63 Input Signals 5 64 Bi directional signals 5 65 Outputs 5 65 LEDs 5 66 BEP Power Supply 5 69 IO Board 5 74 Graphics Adapter 5 76 Internal Storage Devices 5 76 Power distribution 5 77 Purpose of this section 5 77 Main Power Supply 5 77 Power Up Sequence Description 5 82 Power Down Sequence de...

Page 23: ...uct manuals 5 99 User documentation 5 99 Service documentation 5 99 Common Service Desktop overview 5 100 Purpose of this section 5 100 Introduction 5 100 iLinq Interactive Platform Features 5 100 Global Service User Interface GSUI 5 101 Restart VIVID E9 after diagnostics 5 102 ...

Page 24: ...6 5 Cautions and Warnings 6 5 Accessing the Main LCD and Touch Screen Backlight Adjustments 6 5 Backlight and Blue Tint Adjustment 6 6 Adjust LCD Brightness and Contrast 6 6 Test Images 6 7 Touch Screen Calibration 6 10 DC Offset Calibration Front End Alignment 6 11 Introduction 6 11 When to do a Front End Alignment 6 11 Front End Alignment Procedure 6 11 Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism 6 12 Operator ...

Page 25: ...ont End Boards 7 5 Back End Processor 7 6 Operator Panel 7 7 Probes 7 7 Software 7 7 Network Connectivity Troubleshooting 7 8 First Status 7 8 Cannot connect to anything via the network 7 8 No Verify 7 9 System Pings and Verifies OK but does NOT Send 7 9 Gathering Troubleshooting Data 7 10 Collect Vital System Information 7 10 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs 7 11 Screen Captures 7 12 Purpose of ...

Page 26: ...7 17 XY Brake Motors Troubleshooting 7 17 Z Movement fails 7 17 Difficult to lock and release the alphanumeric keyboard 7 18 USB Footswitch 7 19 USB Device s stopped working 7 19 System Temperature Too High 7 20 Noise troubleshooting 7 21 General Recommendations 7 21 EMI Prevention abatement 7 22 ...

Page 27: ...VIVID E9 at delivery or after an upgrade 8 9 Data Management moving all images 8 10 Backing up the Patient Archive and System Configurations 8 10 Recording important settings and parameters 8 11 When to load or reload the software 8 12 Reloading the Software from Repository 8 13 Loading the Software from DVD CD 8 16 Setup after Software loading 8 37 Verifications after the software has been re loa...

Page 28: ...cement 8 116 Upper Bezel replacement 8 118 Frame UI Upper replacement 8 119 Options Holder Left or Right Support replacement 8 121 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots replacement 8 122 Replacing the Operator Panel Lower 8 124 Replacing the Trackball 8 128 Encoder Board replacement 8 130 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer replacement 8 132 Lower Bezel replacement 8 135 Lower Frame Assembly replacement ...

Page 29: ...ssembly replacement 8 198 Replacing Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame 8 200 Main Cable replacement 8 202 Subwoofer replacement 8 205 Casters and Brakes replacement 8 208 Rear Casters replacement 8 208 Front Casters replacement 8 211 Pedal Mechanism replacement 8 214 Brake Pedal replacement 8 216 Pedal Release replacement 8 217 Pedal Dir Lock replacement 8 217 Front End Processor FEP Card Cage parts ...

Page 30: ...A Cable DVR to BEP6 MBD replacement 8 287 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil replacement 8 288 DVR Audio cable replacement 8 289 BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable replacement 8 290 Main Power Supply replacement 8 292 Preparations 8 292 I O Modules replacement 8 295 Patient I O Assembly replacement 8 295 Side I O Board Assembly replacement 8 298 Peripherals replacement 8 303 DVD R W drive replacement ...

Page 31: ...x x 9 13 Covers and Bumpers 9 15 Top Console parts 9 18 LCD Monitor parts 9 18 Operator Panel OP parts 9 19 Top Console PCBs 9 30 Trackball parts 9 33 Operator Panel Cable Kit for Vivid E9 and Logiq E9 9 34 Button Kits and Knobs 9 36 Common Top Console parts 9 43 XYZ parts 9 50 Main Console parts 9 52 Casters Wheels parts 9 54 Front End Processor FEP Card Rack parts 9 56 Front End Processor Card R...

Page 32: ... Top Console Cables 9 74 XYZ Controller cables 9 76 Main Power Supply cables 9 77 Front End Processor FEP cables 9 78 Back End Processor BEP cables 9 79 Peripherals Cables 9 89 ECG cables VIVID E9 9 91 Labels VIVID E9 9 92 Physio TX Parts 9 92 Options VIVID E9 9 93 Options VIVID E9 BT 12 application software v112 x 9 93 Options VIVID E9 BT 11 application software v110 x 9 95 Options VIVID E9 BT 09...

Page 33: ...Preliminary checks 10 6 Functional checks 10 7 Input Power 10 8 Physical inspection 10 9 Cleaning 10 10 Probe maintenance 10 14 Electrical Safety Tests 10 20 Safety Test Overview 10 21 Leakage Current Limits 10 22 Outlet Test Wiring Arrangement USA Canada 10 24 Grounding Continuity 10 24 Chassis Leakage Current Test 10 25 Isolated Patient Lead Source Leakage Lead to Ground 10 26 Isolated Patient L...

Page 34: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL xxxii ...

Page 35: ...must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing a unit 1 1 2 Contents in this chapter 1 1 Overview 1 1 1 2 Service manual overview 1 2 1 3 Important conventions 1 6 1 4 Safety considerations 1 11 1 5 Labels locations 1 16 1 6 Dangerous procedure warnings 1 32 1 7 Lockout Tagout LOTO requirements 1 33 1 8 Returning Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 1 33 1 9...

Page 36: ...ontents in this service manual CHAPTER NUMBER CHAPTER TITLE DESCRIPTION 1 Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings 2 Site preparations Contains pre installation requirements for the VIVID E9 3 System setup Contains installation procedure with installation checklist 4 General procedures and Functional checks Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the installation o...

Page 37: ...x v112 1 x v112 1 x GA200890 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA000950 Vivid E9 100 230V 4D Expert Option 19 LCD GB200001 BEP6 w 4D v104 3 4 or higher v112 0 7 or higher v112 1 x GB200003 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia Quadro 2000D v104 3 3 or higher v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA200890 BEP w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GB000040 Vivid E9 100 230V BT12 Pro Configuration 17...

Page 38: ...800 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 3 2 v110 1 x GA200890 or GA200800 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000830 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 17 LCD GA200804 VE9 Card Rack Complete w MLA4 GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000835 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 19 LCD GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA20080...

Page 39: ...e full spectrum of operating frequencies Signal flow from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End and then over to the Back End Processor and finally to the monitor and peripherals System configuration is stored on the hard drive in the Back End Processor All necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up 1 2 4 2 Purpose of the operator manual s The operator manuals should be full...

Page 40: ... personal are labeled in one of three ways DANGER WARNING CAUTION When a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk a NOTICE is used Example Disk drive may crash NOTE Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure NOTE Be sure to read the notes the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort DANGER...

Page 41: ... make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm Even if a symbol isn t used in this manual it may be included for your reference Some others icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed Table 1 3 Standard hazard icons ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION LASER HEAT PINCH Table 1 4 Standard Icons that indicates that a special procedure is to be used AVO...

Page 42: ...n the box symbol IEC 878 02 05 indicates equipment having a floating applied part having a degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact Probe connectors and ECG connector On newer systems also on the rear of the system DEFIBRILLATOR PROOF TYPE CF EQUIPMENT At the ECG connector on front of system Device Listing Certification Labels Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with ind...

Page 43: ... for a Group 1 Class B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601 1 2 IEC 60601 1 2 REAR OF CONSOLE CAUTION The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user VARIOUS ATTENTION Consult accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label VARIO...

Page 44: ...e earth grounding terminal USED SEVERAL PLACES INSIDE THE SCANNER Equipotential Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting grounding with other equipment as described in IEC60601 1 REAR OF CONSOLE This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separate...

Page 45: ...EROUS VOLTAGES CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING TESTING AND ADJUSTING WARNING WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING VIVID E9 SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE WARNING WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD PLACING P...

Page 46: ...NG DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD WARNING WARNING DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS ONLY INSTALL GE APPROVED PARTS DO NOT PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT ...

Page 47: ...NG NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK IT MAY BE DAMAGED WARNING WARNING THE SYSTEM SHOULD NOT BE MOVED WITH THE OPERATING PANEL EXTENDED POSITION THE OPERATING PANEL IN ITS CENTERED AND LOCKED POSITION LOWER THE OPERATING PANEL AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE BEFORE MOVING THE SYSTEM WARNING WARNING REMEMBER IF THE FRONT CASTER SWIVEL LOCK IS ENGAGED FOR TRANSPORTATION PRESSING...

Page 48: ... UNCONTROLLED MOTION AND COSTLY DAMAGE ALWAYS BE SURE THE PATHWAY IS CLEAR USE SLOW CAREFUL MOTIONS USE TWO PEOPLE WHEN MOVING ON INCLINES OR LIFTING MORE THAN 16 KG 35 LBS CAUTION DO NOT TRANSPORT VIVID E9 IN A VEHICLE WITHOUT LOCKING THE CASTERS WHEELS AND SECURING IT CAUTION USE PROTECTIVE GLASSES DURING DRILLING FILING AND DURING ALL OTHER WORK WHERE EYES NEED PROTECTION CAUTION USE SAFETY SHO...

Page 49: ...be shared with other types of equipment Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards 1 4 4 2 Probes Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the housing cable strain relief lens seal connector pins locking mechanism Do not use a damaged or defective probe Nev...

Page 50: ... Labels locations Section 1 5 Labels locations 1 5 1 Label on Front of LCD Monitor 1 5 2 Label on Rear of LCD Monitor Table 1 6 Label on Front of LCD Monitor DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION LABEL GE LOGO Table 1 7 Label on Rear of LCD Monitor DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION LABEL LCD MERCURY_RATING ...

Page 51: ...NAMEPLATE GOLD UPPER OP PANEL Used on VIVID E9 with 4D Expert option VIVID E9 NAMEPLATE BRONZE UPPER OP PANEL Used on VIVID E9 with 2D Vivid E9 Nameplate Periwinkle Upper OP Panel Used on VIVID E9 Pro VIVID E9 NAMEPLATE UPPER OP PANEL SILVER Used on VIVID E9 BT 09 Table 1 9 Labels on top of Console DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION LABEL WARNING Do not push VIVID E9 sideways when casters are in brakeage po...

Page 52: ... Labels locations 1 5 6 Labels near Connectors on Front Table 1 10 Labels near Connectors on Front DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label Front Panel Label Patient IO DEFIBRILLATOR PROOF TYPE CF EQUIPMENT Label Probe Connectors Label Doppler Pedof Connector 5166825 rev2 GA314321 01 GA314385 01 ...

Page 53: ... on DVD Units 1 5 8 Label on External I O Table 1 11 Labels on DVD units DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label DVD Label DVR Digital Video Recorder Table 1 12 Labels on External I O DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label for External Connectors IO Board DVD GA314383 01 DVR Digital Video Recorder GA314384 01 R L 5180173 rev1 ...

Page 54: ...ection 1 5 Labels locations 1 5 9 Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker Table 1 13 Labels on AC Power Supply Main Power Supply DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label AC Controller Label System Part Number and Power Rating Label System Serial Number and manufacturing week year ...

Page 55: ...1 5 10 1 Label General Info BT 12 Table 1 14 Label General Info BT 12 DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label General Info BT 12 International Introduced JUN 2012 Label General Info BT 12 International Label General Info BT 11 and BT 12 Importer Alkan Medical Egypt Label General Info BT 11 and BT 12 Importer GE Medical Systems Egypt ...

Page 56: ...eral Info BT 11 BT 10 Table 1 15 Label General Info BT 11 BT 10 sheet 1 of 3 DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label General Info BT 11 International Introduced SEP 2010 Label General Info BT 11 International Introduced AUG 2010 Label General Info BT 11 International Label General Info BT 11 and BT 12 Importer Alkan Medical Egypt ...

Page 57: ... General Info BT 11 and BT 12 Importer GE Medical Systems Egypt Label General Info BT 11 Korean Used after June 1 2012 Label General Info BT 11 Korean Used before June 1 2012 Label General Info BT 11 and BT 12 Egypt Table 1 15 Label General Info BT 11 BT 10 cont d sheet 2 of 3 DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION ...

Page 58: ...ARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 1 24 Section 1 5 Labels locations Label General Info BT 10 Chinese Table 1 15 Label General Info BT 11 BT 10 cont d sheet 3 of 3 DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION ...

Page 59: ...VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 1 Introduction 1 25 1 5 10 3 Label General Info BT 09 Table 1 16 Label on Rear Cover DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION Label General Info BT 09 International Label General Info BT 09 Chinese Label General Info BT 09 Korean ...

Page 60: ...Dangerous voltage the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle is used to indicate electric shock hazards ATTENTION Consult accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label The system is not designed for use with flammable anesthetic gases This precaution is intended to...

Page 61: ...orted municipal waste and must be collected separately Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment This unit carries the CE mark The VIVID E9 unit complies with regulatory requirements of the European Directive 93 42 EEC concerning medical devices It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1 Class B Medical...

Page 62: ...LASS I The VIVID E9 ultrasound unit is a Class I device type CF according to Sub clause 14 of IEC60601 1 1988 TYPE CF Equipment Type CF heart in the box symbol IEC 878 02 05 indicates equipment having a floating applied part having a degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact MANUFACTURER Table 1 17 Label on Rear Cover detailed descriptions cont d sheet 3 of 3 DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATIO...

Page 63: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 1 Introduction 1 29 1 5 12 Label on the BEP6 s door Figure 1 2 Label on the BEP6 s door ...

Page 64: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 1 30 Section 1 5 Labels locations 1 5 13 Label on the BEP5 s door Figure 1 3 Label on the BEP5 s door ...

Page 65: ...ION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 1 Introduction 1 31 1 5 14 Label Disassembly Nester This label is located on the outside of the Front End Rack s cover inside unit Figure 1 4 Label Disassembly Nester ...

Page 66: ...WHEN HANDLING TESTING AND ADJUSTING WARNING WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING VIVID E9 SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE WARNING WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZ...

Page 67: ...uld a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site for example body coils or an ultrasound probe The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry as well as the people who will receive or open this package NOTE The US Department of Transportation DOT has ruled that items that were saturated and or dripping with human blood...

Page 68: ... E9 conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge radiated and conducted RF fields magnetic fields and power line transient requirements Applicable standards are 47CFR Part 18 IEC60601 1 2 2001 NOTE For CE Compliance it is critical that all covers screws shielding gaskets mesh clamps are in good condition installed tightly without sk...

Page 69: ... speed capacity type 8 Save secondary image capture cine loop 4D multi volume loop NOTE Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning Table 1 18 Phone numbers for Customer Assistance LOCATION PHONE NUMBER USA GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 9900 Innovation Drive Wauwatosa WI 53226 Service On site Service Parts Application Support 1 800 437 1171 1 800 558 2040 1 800 68...

Page 70: ... SERVICE MANUAL 1 36 Section 1 10 Customer assistance 1 10 2 System manufacturer Table 1 19 System manufacturer MANUFACTURER PHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER GE VINGMED ULTRASOUND A S STRANDPROMENADEN 45 P O BOX 141 NO 3191 HORTEN NORWAY 47 3302 1100 47 3302 1350 ...

Page 71: ...verview 2 1 1 Purpose of this chapter This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the setup of a VIVID E9 Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit 2 1 2 Contents in this chapter 2 1 Overview 2 1 2 2 General console requirements 2 2 2 3 Facility needs 2 9 ...

Page 72: ... to 140 ºF Humidity Limits Operation 30 60 rH non condensing Storage and Transport 30 95 rH non condensing Air Pressure Limits Operation 700 1060 hPa Storage and Transport 700 1060 hPa Heat Dissipation 3800 BTU h CAUTION IF THE UNIT IS VERY COLD OR HOT DO NOT TURN ON ITS POWER UNTIL IT HAS HAD A CHANCE TO ACCLIMATE TO ITS OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Table 2 1 VIVID E9 Acclimate Time oC 40 35 30 25 20 15...

Page 73: ...he room Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU h demand on the cooling system 2 2 1 4 Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation updates and repairs However operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect Therefore a combination lighting system dim bright is recommended Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a sourc...

Page 74: ...a then a center tapped power source is required Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live The dedicated line shall consist of one phase a neutral not shared with any other circuit and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral The dedicated line shall consist of one phase two lines not s...

Page 75: ... 2 5 Unit power plug If the unit arrives without a power plug or with the wrong plug you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required Table 2 2 Electrical specifications for VIVID E9 PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TOLERANCES POWER CONSUMPTION FREQUENCY BT 12 GA000940 Vivid E9 4D Expert Option 17 LCD 100 230 VAC 10 1100 W 50 60 Hz GA000950 Vivid E9 ...

Page 76: ...eral console requirements 2 2 2 6 Power stability requirements Voltage drop out Max 10 ms Power transients all applications Less than 25 of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient including line frequency synchronous asynchronous or aperiodic transients ...

Page 77: ...ence problems caused by high frequency high powered radio or video broadcast signals Ground the unit Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet Install all screws RF gaskets covers cores After you finish repairing or updating the system replace all covers and tighten all screws Any cable with an external connection requ...

Page 78: ...50 to 104 ºF 5 to 42 7 ºC 41 to 108 9 ºF Storage 20 to 50 ºC 4 to 122 ºF 20 to 60 ºC 4 to 140 ºF Temperatures in degrees Celsius o C conversion to degrees F o F o C 9 5 32 CAUTION PAMPTE probes are designed for storage temperatures of 20 to 60 degrees C 4 to 140 degrees F Electronic probes are designed for storage temperatures of 20 to 50 degrees C 4 to 122 degrees F When exposed to large temperat...

Page 79: ... performed by qualified personnel The products involved and the accompanying electrical installations are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment The de...

Page 80: ...efined Neutral The dedicated line shall consist of one phase two lines not shared with any other circuit and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage see Table 2 2 on page 2 5 meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2 5 m 8 ft from the unit s proposed location Door opening is at le...

Page 81: ...binet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals 2 3 4 Minimal floor plan suggestion 2 3 5 Suggested Floor Plan VIVID E9 and EchoPAC PC in Same Room Figure 2 1 Minimal Floor Plan 2 5 m x 3 m 8 by 10 foot Figure 2 2 Suggested Room with EchoPAC PC and Ultrasound Scanner Power outlet GE cabinet for software and manuals optional Ethernet Connector Ultrasound Unit Scale Each square equals o...

Page 82: ...ges in this manner frees up the on board monitor and peripherals enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues With DICOM images can be archived stored and retrieved faster easier and at a lower cost 2 3 6 5 DICOM option setup requirements To configure the VIVID E9 to work with other network connections the site s network administrator must provide information to complete the form in Figure...

Page 83: ...e 2 3 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information VIVID E9 Host Name AE Title Local Port IP Address Net Mask ROUTING INFORMATION ROUTER2 ROUTER3 ROUTER1 Destination IP Addresses GATEWAY IP Addresses Default DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION NAME Store 2 Store 3 Store 1 MAKE REVISION IP ADDRESSES PORT AE TITLE Store 5 Store 6 Store 4 Storage Commit MPPS Worklist ...

Page 84: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 2 14 Section 2 3 Facility needs This page left blank to facilitate double sided printing ...

Page 85: ...the actual installation and how to check and test the unit probes and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure 3 1 2 Contents in this chapter 3 1 Overview 3 1 3 2 Setup reminders 3 2 3 3 Receiving and unpacking the equipment 3 3 3 4 Packing materials for the Wooden Box recycling information 3 16 3 5 Packing materials for the Carton Box recycling information 3 17 3 ...

Page 86: ...H THE UNIT CAUTION IF THE UNIT IS VERY COLD OR HOT DO NOT TURN ON ITS POWER UNTIL IT HAS HAD A CHANCE TO ACCLIMATE TO ITS OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Table 3 2 VIVID E9 Acclimate Time o C 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 o F 40 31 22 13 4 5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149 158 Hrs 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 CAUTION TO PREVE...

Page 87: ...SER MANUAL S SHOULD BE FULLY READ AND UNDERSTOOD BEFORE OPERATING THE VIVID E9 AND KEPT NEAR THE UNIT FOR QUICK REFERENCE CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD ALTHOUGH THE ULTRASOUND ENERGY TRANSMITTED FROM THE VIVID E9 PROBE IS WITHIN AIUM NEMA STANDARDS AVOID UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE ULTRASOUND ENERGY CAN PRODUCE HEAT AND MECHANICAL DAMAGE CAUTION TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO UNPACK THE UNIT BECAUSE OF ITS WE...

Page 88: ...n if the handling during transportation has been improper a set of Tilt Shock indicators have been attached to the transportation box 3 3 3 2 Position of the Tilt and Shock indicators The Tilt Shock indicators have been attached to the right side of the transportation box as illustrated in the figure below The wooden box is used in the illustrated below but the Tilt and Shock indicators are also u...

Page 89: ... the Tilt Indicator red colored inside the middle of the indicator If yes The Tilt Indicator has been activated Continue with the instructions in subsection 3 3 4 2 Damage in transportation before you continue with the next step If no continue with the next step 4 Wooden box ONLY The two upper hinges on the Front Side and the Rear Side of the wooden transportation box have been sealed with red pla...

Page 90: ...the carrier Whether noted or concealed damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery or in any event within 14 days after receipt and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period Table 3 5 Shock Indicator has triggered or is missing STEP TASK 1 ...

Page 91: ...ilt Indicator has triggered or is missing STEP TASK 1 If the Tilt Indicator is missing Note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that the Tilt Indicator label is missing If the Tilt Indicator has triggered Note on the shipping papers at the time of receipt that the Tilt Indicator label was activated 2 Inspect the product for possible concealed damage ...

Page 92: ... 㟝 㤵GaG㫸 㡸G㠸䚌㜠G䞌 㜄G㸼㢀䑀G㜄 㫴 G㤸 SG ⵌ G㐔䝬 G 㐔䚌㜠G㜵ㇵ㹠㜵GⵃG㐠㣙ḰG䜼Ḵ㢌G 㜵ㇵ㹠㜵㜄G 㟝 G㸼㢀䑀㜵ㇵ㫸 㣙㾌 䖼 䛼ᴴⶼ䝬aG 䛼W TYW 䝬 㢹㣄㢌 㥐㦤㠄 GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS O 㠜㢨P ㇵ䝬 ⵃ 㨰 㫴㢨䜠 䀴㛨䂈 㙸 ර 㟬㐐Gᵉ ẠG䚍 GZ ZG wvihGᵉ G䇴㠀G SG_㽩 Vivid E9 䝉 䖼 GaG 䞌ὤ㟝㸼㢀䑀㜵ㇵ㫸 㣙㾌 Vivid E9 116x78x133 mm LxWxH 128 kg 200 kg ӗ ᖙ㢢䎵༠䇺ᯝԚ රਧ ࠪল㕆ਧ ӗᰕᵏ ᴰབྷཆරቪረ Max size 䟽 Net weight 䟽 Gross weight ਧ Box No ӗলᇦ GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS ൠ Strandpromenade 45 N 3191 Horten...

Page 93: ... E9 Transportation Box Label printed on the Carton Box ICONS and SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION ICONS and SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION ICONS and SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION KEEP AIR PRESSURE BETWEEN 70 kPa and 106 kPa DO NOT STACK FRAGILE HANDLE WITH CARE KEEP TRANSPORTATION TEMPERATURE BETWEEN 20 C AND 60 C TOP UPRIGHT TRANSPORTA TION AND STORAGE KEEP DRY PROTECT FROM MOISTURE RELATIVE HUMIDITY BETWEEN 30 AND 95 HANDLE WITH...

Page 94: ... On the first version of the Transportation Box only the front door is meant to be used as a ramp It has bevel cut in one end 2 Place the front door as a ramp against the rear edge of the pallet 3 Carefully remove the accessory box and any other items including the wooden shelf above the scanners Operator Panel and all the filling material from the Transportation Box Front door bevel cut This end ...

Page 95: ... the wheels are swiveling when the system is inside the transportation box it may jam the system inside the box The system must be moved backwards both into and out of the transportation box Moving the system into the transportation box 1 Align the front wheel under the front end of the system as shown in Figure 1 2 Push the direction lock pedal to lock the front wheels in this direction Check tha...

Page 96: ...3 2 Setup reminders 3 3 6 Unpacking VIVID E9 from the Carton Box Table 3 8 Uncrating the VIVID E9 sheet 1 of 4 Step Task Illustration 1 Cut the straps around the crate 2 Remove the Top Cover 3 Remove the Complete Column Left and Complete Column Right 4 Remove the Box For Accessories ...

Page 97: ...9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 3 System setup 3 13 5 Remove the two Frames sides and the two Exit Ramp Bases 6 Install the two Exit Ramp Base on the Complete Exit Ramp the rear plate Table 3 8 Uncrating the VIVID E9 cont d sheet 2 of 4 Step Task Illustration ...

Page 98: ...MANUAL 3 14 Section 3 2 Setup reminders 7 Remove the Inlay UI Top 8 Remove the Support For Monitor 9 Remove the Complete Front Protection 10 Remove the clear plastic bag from the VIVID E9 Table 3 8 Uncrating the VIVID E9 cont d sheet 3 of 4 Step Task Illustration ...

Page 99: ...irection stability when the system is rolled down the ramp from the pallet 1 Direction Dir Lock 2 Release Dir Lock and Front Brakes 3 Front Brakes 4 Rear Brakes 13 Unlock the Rear Brakes 14 Carefully move the VIVID E9 down the ramp with rear end first 15 Assemble the empty transportation box and place all of the filling inside the box before you close it Close the box and store it for possible fut...

Page 100: ... recycling information The packing materials for VIVID E9 are recyclable The Transportation Box is made of spruce or similar material PHYTOSANITARY CERTIFICATE included in all shipments to The People s Republic of China Lever lockings hinges are made of zinc plated steel The inner reinforcements are made of Ethafoam Polyethylene foam The plastic foil is made of LDPE Low Density Polyethylene ...

Page 101: ...efer to the table below Table 3 9 Packaging parts for VIVID E9 sheet 1 of 2 Item Description Qty Material Illustration 1 Export pallet 1200 x 800 1 D 2 Complete base 1 A 3 Complete column left and right 2 A 4 Support for monitor 1 C 5 Inlay UI Top 1 C 6 Complete front protection 1 B 7 Complete Exit ramp 1 A 8 Frame 1112 x 740 x 1225 2 A 9 Exit ramp base 2 A 10 Box for accessories 1 A 11 Top cover ...

Page 102: ...ection 3 5 Packing materials for the Carton Box recycling information Material type A B C D BB34bc with varnish C9068 BB27c with varnish C9068 PE foam Stratocell Wood ISPM15 Table 3 9 Packaging parts for VIVID E9 cont d sheet 2 of 2 Item Description Qty Material Illustration ...

Page 103: ...inspection If the system has been damaged please refer to Damage in Transportation on page x in the beginning of this manual 3 6 3 EMI protection This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro Magnetic Interference EMI Many of the covers shields and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference For this reason it is imperative ...

Page 104: ...on site conditions 3 7 2 2 Physical dimensions The physical dimensions of the VIVID E9 unit are summarized in Table 3 10 3 7 2 3 Mass with monitor and peripherals 3 7 2 4 Acoustic noise level Less than 55 dB A at 20 degrees Celsius measured in the operators head position 20 cm in front of the keyboard s right corner at 1 30 m above the floor and in a distance of 1 meter at all four sides 1 meter a...

Page 105: ...EVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE UNIT Figure 3 4 Mains Voltage Rating label Table 3 12 Electrical specifications for VIVID E9 PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION VOLTAGE TOLERANCES POWER CONSUMPTION FREQUENCY BT 12 GA000940 Vivid E9 4D Expert Option 17 LCD 100 230 VAC 10 1100 W 50 60 Hz GA000950 Vivid E9 4D Expert Option 19 LCD GA000945 Vivid E9 2D 17 LCD GA000955 Vivid E9 2D 19 LCD GB000040 Vivid E9 BT12 PR...

Page 106: ... the requirements of the valid version of IEC60601 1 1 If in doubt consult the technical service department or your local representative for GE Healthcare 3 7 4 1 Connect Ethernet Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector on the External I O rear side of VIVID E9 3 7 4 2 Connect USB Flash Card NOTE USB Flash Cards approved for VIVID E9 are verified for EMC performance according to EN550...

Page 107: ...er See Section 9 20 Physio TX Parts on page 9 92 Connect the Heart Microphone via the corresponding Phono Adapter to the Phono input on the Patient I O panel 3 7 5 3 Connect Pulse Pressure Transducer Connect the Pulse Pressure Transducer via the corresponding Auxiliary Pressure Adapter to the Patient I O panel For Part Number and model information see Section 9 20 Physio TX Parts on page 9 92 Figu...

Page 108: ...port three PDT probe ports Figure 3 9 and a Doppler probe port The PD probe port is compatible with the Vivid 7 probe connectors The three PDT probe ports are specific to the VIVID E9 probe connectors The Doppler probe port is used for CW Doppler probes non sector probes sometimes called PEDOF probes Figure 3 9 Probe connectors 1 PD PROBE PORT FOR VIVID 7 COMPATIBLE PROBE CONNECTORS 2 PDT PROBE PO...

Page 109: ...nto place 5 Turn the locking handle clockwise to the full vertical position to lock in place 6 Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor 3 7 6 3 Disconnect a probe 1 Rotate the lock handle counter clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector 2 Remove the connector from the port 3 Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case ...

Page 110: ... For a detailed procedure see 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR DANGER NEVER USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER THIS DEFEATS THE SAFETY GROUND DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL GRADE TYPE WHERE REQUIRED CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVE...

Page 111: ...r Location Figure 3 10 Hospital and department name Table 3 13 Location name STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT S 1 Select the Hospital field see Figure 3 10 and type the name of the hospital max 64 characters The 24 first characters of this name are displayed on the scanning screen s title bar after restart All 64 are displayed on the image properties on saved images after restart 2 Select in the Departme...

Page 112: ...n MM DD YYYY format is used 3 Select the preferred Time Format see c in Figure 3 11 24 the 24 hour format is used 12 the 12 AM PM hour format is used 4 Adjust the date see a in Figure 3 11 New date is displayed 5 Adjust the time see b in Figure 3 11 New time is displayed 6 Select Default Century 1900 2000 or None see e in Figure 3 11 1900 the number 19 is automatically displayed when entering the ...

Page 113: ...nguage Adjustments STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT S 1 Open the Configuration Window see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 Select System if needed The System Settings window is displayed 2 Use the Language drop down dialog see Figure 3 12 to select your preferred language for the on screen interface The selected language will be used as soon as the unit has been restarted LANGUAGE ...

Page 114: ... Online Manual Language Selection STEP TASK EXPECTED RESULT S 1 Open the Configuration Window see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 Select System if needed The System Settings window is displayed 2 Use the Manual Language drop down dialog see Figure 3 13 to select your preferred language The selected language will be used as soon as the unit has been restarted MANUAL LANGUAGE ...

Page 115: ...K EXPECTED RESULT S 1 Open the Configuration Window see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 Select System if needed The System Settings window is displayed 2 Use the drop down dialog to select Metric or US Units The selected units Metric or US will be used for measurements as soon as the unit has been restarted 3 Restart the scanner All the changed settings will be used after the rest...

Page 116: ... Format to be used by DVR Select DVR Adjust LCD s Contrast and Backlight Intensity Alphanumeric Keyboard Setups Printer Setup Monitor Selection 3 8 3 2 Open Service Screen 1 Press Config F2 and log on as adm see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Service lower right part of window to view the Service Screen see Figure 3 15 on page 3 32 Figure 3 15 Service Screen SERVICE ...

Page 117: ...ric Keyboard configuration NOTE This Procedure is not required if the alphanumeric keyboard is a US keyboard since the default setting is set to US English keyboards 1 Select Keyboard Setup to get access to Keyboard Properties 2 Select Languages to display the program languages screen 3 Use the Language used in menus and dialogs scroll bar to find the correct language for your use Figure 3 16 Sele...

Page 118: ...er installation procedure for correct printer installation See 3 8 4 Optional Peripherals Peripheral Connection on page 3 36 for more information 1 Select Add Printer to start the Add Printer Installation Wizard 2 Follow the instructions in the Wizard to install a new printer 3 8 3 6 Monitor Selection Some characteristics are different for the different LCD monitors Select the Monitor model in the...

Page 119: ... NOTE Installation instructions for the Digital Video Recorder DVR option is included in the DVR Installation manual Direction Number GA294614 Selecting Offline mode Follow these steps to select Offline mode for the DVR 1 Install media in the DVR Recorder 2 Go into Config F2 Service 3 Select Offline 4 Reboot the VIVID E9 ...

Page 120: ...nochrome Printer P95DE Digital Video Recorder DVR 3 8 4 2 External Peripherals Optional for Connection to USB One of the external units listed below may be connected to the USB port on the rear of the VIVID E9 Footswitch Configuration of the footswitch is done on the Config Imaging Application screen For more information refer to the VIVID E9 User Manual External Data Storage USB Flash Card Iomega...

Page 121: ...nnected via Ethernet TCP IP Network please refer to the respective printer s documentation The VIVID E9 supports the following network printers HP OfficeJet Pro 8000 HP OfficeJet PRO K5400dn HP OfficeJet PRO K550 HP Color LaserJet 3600n HP Laser Jet Pro 400 color M451 HP Color LaserJet CP2025n HP Inkjet 1200DTN HP Inkjet 1100DTN HP Deskjet 6127 HP Deskjet 990 Cxi LEXMARK C762N LEXMARK C752N LEXMAR...

Page 122: ...Password Software Option String enables a software option or a combination of software options This password is specific for each VIVID E9 3 8 5 2 Installing a Software Option 1 Press Config F2 and log on as adm see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Admin lower part of window 3 Select the System Admin tab Figure 3 22 System Admin screen SYSTEM ADMIN TAB NEW ADMIN ...

Page 123: ... the Password Software Option Key Alphanumeric string 6 Press Save to save the new setting 7 Restart to save and activate the settings and adjustments you have done so far Figure 3 23 Type Software Option Key Alphanumeric string CAUTION INCORRECT PASSWORD ENTRY WILL RESULT IN LOSS OF SYSTEM OPTIONS IF PASSWORD IS INCORRECT PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL GE SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE OR THE ONLINE CENTER Fi...

Page 124: ...end of the crossed network cable to the network connector on the VIVID E9 b Connect the other end to the network connector to the EchoPAC PC Workstation see chapter 3 in the EchoPAC PC Workstation Service Manual Connection via a Peer to Peer Network You will need a network hub and one network cable for each unit connected to the hub Connection via Hospital Network You will need one network cable t...

Page 125: ...lt delivery settings 3 10 1 Introduction To be able to use the network functions when connected to a hospital network the scanner must have a proper network address Before you can set up the scanner you need to collect some information The Worksheet for DICOM Network Information on page 2 13 can be used for gathering this information Typical source for this information is the network administrator...

Page 126: ...9 COMPUTER NAME AE TITLE FOR VIVID E9 THIS NAME IS ON THE FORM VIVIDX 00NNNN WHERE 00NNNN IS A NUMBER NNNN IS THE SCANNER S SERIAL NUMBER PORT NO DEFAULT PORT NUMBER 104 REMOTE ARCHIVE SETUP AREA IP SETTINGS AREA FOR A REMOTE ARCHIVE EXAMPLE ECHOPAC PC ECHOPAC7 DEFAULT SETUP REMOTE ARCHIVE IP ADDR 10 0 0 4 REMOTE ARCHIVE NAME THE NAME OF THE PC OR SERVER WITH THE REMOTE ARCHIVE ECHOPAC7 000001 DET...

Page 127: ...hange AE Title and or Port No edit the respective fields 2 Select Save settings to store your changes This will bring up a new Warning screen 3 Select Ok to save your changes or Cancel to return without saving any changes 4 Reboot VIVID E9 to activate the settings or continue with other Tcpip set up tasks Figure 3 25 AE Title and Port No Figure 3 26 Warning ...

Page 128: ...s use of DHCP 1 When in the TCP IP screen select Network Settings to display the Network Connections screen see Figure 3 28 Network Connections on page 3 44 2 Right click Local Area Connection and select Properties from the pop up menu to go to the Local Area Connection Properties screen see next page Figure 3 27 Advanced Settings Figure 3 28 Network Connections NETWORK SETTINGS ...

Page 129: ...AL Chapter 3 System setup 3 45 3 10 5 DHCP setup cont d 3 Select Properties to display the Local Area Connection Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol TCP IP then select Properties Figure 3 29 Local Area Connection Status Figure 3 30 Local Area Connection Properties ...

Page 130: ... the IP address Subnet mask Default gateway To save your new settings and close the open windows 1 Select OK to save the setting and close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog 2 Select OK to close and save the Local Area Connection Properties dialog 3 Select Close to close the Local Area Connection Status dialog 4 Select the x in the upper right corner to close the Network Connections wi...

Page 131: ...r or server you must configure VIVID E9 to communicate with it In the Remote Archive Setup area of the Tcpip screen see example in Figure 3 32 enter the 1 Remote Archive IP address Default IP Address from factory 10 0 0 4 2 Remote Archive Name Default Remote Archive Name from factory ECHOPAC7 000001 Figure 3 32 TCP IP Set up for VIVID E9 IP ADDRESS FOR THE REMOTE ARCHIVE COMPUTER NAME FOR THE REMO...

Page 132: ...low 2 Select OK to save the new settings By selecting Cancel the previous settings will be kept 3 The new settings are saved to a common settings file After a restart the settings are also included in other screens 4 Restart VIVID E9 to activate the changes 5 Select Worklist The Worklist entry must be highlighted 6 Select Properties to display the Properties dialog Figure 3 33 Save New TCP IP sett...

Page 133: ...eters long so it must be placed within reach of this cable 3 11 2 1 Preparations for installing the CP30DW for the first time Set Switch 1 and 2 on the rear side of the printer to ON Please refer to the documentation for the printer if you need help to locate the switches Please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual Direction GA294652 Rev 3 or newer if you need to install a new printer d...

Page 134: ...ion User s Manuals Installation Manuals etc for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation This will ensure that all relevant safety and user informations are available during the operation and service of the complete system 3 12 1 User s Manual s Check that the correct User Manual s or CD with User Manuals per software SW revision and language for the system is...

Page 135: ...roduct Locator Installation Card NOTE The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be the same as the provided Product Locator card From the factory a sheet with five Product Locator cards for transportation and one for Installation are included Figure 3 35 Product Locator Installation Card Example ...

Page 136: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 3 52 Section 3 12 Setup paperwork This page left blank to facilitate double sided printing ...

Page 137: ... and Functional checks Section 4 1 Overview 4 1 1 Purpose of this chapter This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the VIVID E9 scanner and diagnostics instructions using the built in service software 4 1 2 Contents in this chapter 4 1 Overview 4 1 4 2 General procedures 4 3 4 3 Functional checks 4 37 4 4 Site Log 4 52 ...

Page 138: ...ired An empty blank DVD RW disc ECG Pads ECG Harness CABLE ECG MARQ AHA AMERICA P N 164L0025 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ AHA AMERICA P N 164L0027 or CABLE ECG MARQ IEC EU AS P N 164L0026 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ IEC EU AS P N 164L0028 At least one probe ideally you should check all the site probes used by the system ...

Page 139: ...and cooling purposes CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION Beware that the Main Power Supply and B...

Page 140: ...A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR DANGER NEVER USE A THREE TO TWO PRONG ADAPTER THIS DEFEATS THE SAFETY GROUND DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL GRADE TYPE WHERE REQUIRED CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE SECURELY IN PLACE THE COVERS ...

Page 141: ... unit can be moved slightly 3 Verify that the power cable is without any visible scratches or any sign of damage 4 Verify that the on site mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit Breaker on the rear of the unit 5 Connect the Power Cable s female plug to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit 6 Lock the plug in position with the Retaining Clamp ACC Clamp 7...

Page 142: ...ter a few seconds listen to the fan sound b Power is distributed to the peripherals Operator Panel Console Monitor Front End Processor and Back End Processor c Back End Processor and rest of scanner starts with the sequence listed in the next steps d Back End Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software e The Start Screen is displayed on the monitor f A start up bar indicating the time u...

Page 143: ...as been loaded either a 2D screen is displayed on the screen indicating that a probe has been connected or a No Mode screen is displayed indicating that no probe has been connected NOTE Total time used for start up is typical one and a half minutes or less If starting after a power loss or a lock up the start up time may be up to four minutes Figure 4 4 2D Screen on the display ...

Page 144: ...urrent user The system remains ON and ready for a new user to log on If the Logoff button is dimmed it indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment Shutdown Use this button to shut down the system The entire system will shut down It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week If the Shutdown button is dimmed use the key combination Ctrl Alt R to shut down the un...

Page 145: ...he Top Console will be released so you can move the Top Console in the XY directions 2 Press once on the On Off key on the Operator Panel to display the System Exit menu 3 Select Shutdown to do a complete power down of the unit The Back End Processor will first turn off the scanner activity and print the message Please wait Shutdown in progress in the LCD display on the Operator Panel Next it star...

Page 146: ...Mains Power Circuit Breaker located on the rear of the unit This will cut power distribution within the unit NOTICE Be sure to wait with the next step until the system has finished its shut down Failing to do so may destroy data on the hard disk making the system fail later Figure 4 8 Circuit Breaker located at rear of the unit MAINS POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER ...

Page 147: ...p Console out of the locked position until the Top console is in the desired position 2 Release the button s 4 2 3 3 To lock the Top Console 1 Press and hold down the Lock and brake release button s Figure 4 9 button 1 while pushing the Top Console in the locked position 2 Release the button s 4 2 3 4 To move the floating Top Console 1 The unlocked Top Console can be easily moved by pressing and h...

Page 148: ...se the console s XY mechanism frog leg The release point is located on the rear of the XY Mechanism Frog Leg 1 Insert a small tipped screwdriver or eq into the release point and push until a click is heard Some force may be required if the lock adjustment is tight adjusted 2 Move the console to the wanted position Figure 4 10 XY mechanism release Figure 4 11 Manually releasing the XY Lock XY RELEA...

Page 149: ...ted or has failed or if the mains power is turned off or disconnected or if it is a mains power failure Move the handle a few millimeters to the right side to release the Z Mechanism disengage the motor drive unit and at the same time move the Top Console up or down as required Figure 4 12 Up Down Release Handle WARNING WARNING OPERATOR CONSOLE CAN DROP UNEXPECTEDLY WHEN THE MECHANISM IS RELEASED ...

Page 150: ...stment 4 2 4 1 To unlock the LCD monitor Turn the release knob counter clockwise to unlock the LCD monitor The LCD monitor can be moved freely in all directions 4 2 4 2 To lock the LCD monitor Turn the release knob clockwise to raise the lock and move the LCD monitor into the parked position Figure 4 13 LCD monitor position adjustment ...

Page 151: ... select Config choose either Procedure A or Procedure B A Procedure A On the Touch Screen 1 Select the Utility tab 2 Then select Config B Procedure B On the alphanumeric keyboard Press F2 Both method A and B will bring up the Operator Login dialog where you must log on Figure 4 14 Select Utility Figure 4 15 Select Config Figure 4 16 Operator Login UTILITY CONFIG ...

Page 152: ...connectivity settings As default the password for ADM is ulsadm Select the name ADM the password ulsadm and select Login It is possible for the administrator ADM to establish new users and set unique passwords for each user including a new password for ADM If the login as ADM fails contact the responsible person in the hospital to get access The Emergency button stores data only from current patie...

Page 153: ...pedal to release the Swivel lock 4 2 6 2 To prepare the unit to be moved 1 If not locked move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position see 4 2 3 Top Console position adjustment on page 4 11 and 4 2 4 LCD Monitor position adjustment on page 4 14 2 Turn the system off including the circuit breaker see 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 and remove the plug from the wall 3 Disconnect a...

Page 154: ...ribed below 1 If not locked move the keyboard console and LCD monitor to the park position see 4 2 3 Top Console position adjustment on page 4 11 and 4 2 4 LCD Monitor position adjustment on page 4 14 2 Disconnect all probes and secure them in their boxes 3 Ensure that the transporting vehicle is appropriate for the unit s weight 4 Park the vehicle on a level surface for loading and unloading 5 Se...

Page 155: ...22 Tcpip see 4 2 7 6 Connectivity Recording the TCP IP settings on page 4 23 System Settings see 4 2 7 7 System Settings on page 4 25 About System Version see 4 2 7 9 About System Version on page 4 26 Admin Disk Management see 4 2 7 13 Admin Disk Management on page 4 27 Backup see 4 2 7 14 Admin Backup on page 4 27 Restore see 4 2 7 15 Admin Restore on page 4 28 Users see 4 2 7 16 Admin Users on p...

Page 156: ...edures 4 2 7 2 Connectivity Dataflow 1 Select Config F2 to log on as ADM Default password ulsadm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Connectivity Dataflow 3 Record the settings for each Dataflow in use by the site Figure 4 19 The Dataflow screen ...

Page 157: ...ulsadm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Connectivity Additional Outputs 3 Select Button P1 in the Button pull down menu 4 Record the settings for Button P1 5 Select Button P2 in the Button pull down menu 6 Record the settings for Button P2 7 Select Button Record in the Button pull down menu 8 Record the settings for Button Record Figure 4 20 ...

Page 158: ...iption see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Connectivity Tools 3 If in use Record the Remote Path 4 If in use Record the Configurable Remote Path User Also ensure that you have the correct Password for this user available before you continue 4 2 7 5 Connectivity Formats Ensure that an Application Specialist have recorded the needed information from the Formats screen Figur...

Page 159: ...Connectivity Tcpip 3 Record all settings in Table 4 1 Record settings from Tcpip screen and sub screens on page 4 24 4 Select Network Settings 5 Double click Local Area Connection 6 Select Properties 7 Double click Internet Protocol TCP IP 8 Select Advanced 9 Record the settings in Table 4 1 Record settings from Tcpip screen and sub screens on page 4 24 Record if DHCP is Enabled Record IP address ...

Page 160: ...tivity Recording the TCP IP settings cont d Table 4 1 Record settings from Tcpip screen and sub screens PARAMETER VALUE COMPUTER NAME AE TITLE PORT NO REMOTE ARCHIVE SETUP REMOTE ARCHIVE IP ADDR REMOTE ARCHIVE NAME DHCP DHCP ENABLED ___ DISABLED ___ IP SETTINGS IF DHCP IS DISABLED IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DEFAULT GATEWAY ...

Page 161: ... see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select System Settings 3 Record the following information for Location Hospital Department 4 Record the following information for Date and Time Time Format Date Format Default Century 5 Record the selected Language 6 Record the selected Manual Language 7 Select the selected Units 4 2 7 8 System Test There are no data on this screen that need ...

Page 162: ...on 3 Record software and hardware versions in Table 4 2 Record Software versions on page 4 26 4 2 7 10 About Firmware Version There are no data on this screen that need to be recorded 4 2 7 11 About HW Version There are no data on this screen that need to be recorded 4 2 7 12 About Probes There are no data on this screen that need to be recorded Figure 4 25 Information available on the About tab T...

Page 163: ...rd ulsadm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Admin Disk Management 3 Record the selected Reminder Interval Every setting 4 2 7 14 Admin Backup 1 Select Config F2 to log on as ADM Default password ulsadm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Admin Backup 3 Record Remote Path Figure 4 26 Disk Man...

Page 164: ...dm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Admin Restore 3 Record Remote Path 4 2 7 16 Admin Users 1 Select Config F2 to log on as ADM Default password ulsadm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Admin Users 3 Select and record all data for each user in the User List Figure 4 27 Users ...

Page 165: ...t Admin System Admin 3 Record the SW Option Key one or more alphanumeric strings from the SW Option Key field Figure 4 28 System Admin Example WARNING WARNING MAKE SURE THAT THE SOFTWARE OPTION KEY ALPHANUMERIC PASSWORDS HAVE BEEN RECORDED CORRECTLY IF THE KEY IS INCORRECT YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO LOG ON AFTER THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION HAS BEEN COMPLETED THE PASSWORD IS CASE SENSITIVE HYPHENS MUST ...

Page 166: ...ord ulsadm For a detailed description see 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 2 Select Service 3 Record Video settings Format in Table 4 4 Service screen settings on page 4 30 4 Record Monitor in Table 4 4 Service screen settings on page 4 30 Figure 4 29 Service Settings Table 4 4 Service screen settings PARAMETER VALUE VIDEO SETTINGS FORMAT ___PAL ___NTSC MONITOR ...

Page 167: ...nd trackball from the keyboard 5 Wipe off any oil or dust from the trackball using a cleaner or dry cloth 6 Wipe off any oil or dust from the trackball housing rollers etc using a cleaner or cotton bud 7 Insert the trackball into the housing 8 Place the Top Locking Plate including the Rubber Dust Filtering Ring back on the OP and lock it by rotating it clockwise NOTE Plastic hood is not supposed t...

Page 168: ...volves removing the OP and then remove and open the Trackball as described in the procedure below OP 1 An inductive trackball is used on the first version of the Operator Panel It is only needed to clean the inductive trackball if it doesn t move easy This involves removing the OP and then remove and open the Trackball as described in the procedure below 4 2 9 2 Manpower One person 30 minutes 4 2 ...

Page 169: ...on page 8 125 CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION Beware that the Main Power Supply and Back End...

Page 170: ...ures 4 2 9 5 Remove the Trackball Follow these steps to remove the Trackball 1 Unplug the cable connectors from the Trackball 2 Use the Hex key to remove the two fixing screws with shims 3 Remove the Trackball and the Fixing Ring Figure 4 31 Trackball with fixing screws Figure 4 32 Trackball removed ...

Page 171: ...g To get access for cleaning you need to remove the ball The ball is held in position by the Dust Gasket 1 Turn the Dust Gasket counter clockwise to unlock it 2 Remove the Dust Gasket 3 Remove the ball 4 Use a soft antistatic brush and or an antistatic vacuum cleaner to remove any dust both on the ring and inside the ball house 5 When done install the ball and the Dust Gasket Figure 4 33 Remove Tr...

Page 172: ... it so the fixing screw holes on the Fixing Ring align with the fixing screw holes on the Trackball assembly 4 2 9 7 Install the Trackball Follow these steps to install the Trackball 1 Install the Trackball 2 Install the two fixing screws with shims so it locks the Trackball and Fixing Ring in the correct position 3 Connect signal cable connectors to the Trackball 4 2 9 8 Install the Front Panel 1...

Page 173: ...ion Turn on power to VIVID E9 4 3 2 2D Mode B mode Checks 4 3 2 1 Introduction The 2D Mode is the system s default mode 4 3 2 2 Preparations 1 Connect one of the probes See Connecting Probes on page 3 24 for info about connecting the probes 2 Turn ON the scanner The 2D Mode window is displayed default mode Figure 4 37 2D Mode Screen Example Status Window Control Menu ...

Page 174: ...ove to lower frame rate to increase resolution in image Use Frequency move to lower frequency to increase penetration Use the Reject control to reduce noise in the image Use the DDP control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner less noisy image Use UD Clarity Cardiac or UD Speckle reduce non cardiac to reduce image speckle Extra care must be taken to select the optimal S...

Page 175: ...s are used to optimize the M mode picture Verify that all the listed controls are working as intended Adjust Horizontal sweep to optimize the display resolution Adjust Gain and TGC controls to adjust the range to be imaged Use the Frequency move to higher frequencies or the Frame rate control move to lower frame rate to increase resolution in image Use the Frequency move to lower frequency to incr...

Page 176: ...ess trackball to be able to select between Position and Size controls 4 Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the ROI 4 3 4 4 Adjust the Color 2D Mode controls Adjust the Active mode gain to set the gain in the color flow area Adjust Scale to the highest setting that provides adequate flow detection NOTE The scale value may affect FPS Low Velocity Reject and Sample Volume Adjust Low Velocit...

Page 177: ...e gain to set the gain in the color flow area Adjust Scale to the highest setting that provides adequate flow detection NOTE The scale value may affect FPS Low Velocity Reject and Sample Volume Adjust Low Velocity Reject to remove low velocity blood flow and tissue movement that reduces image quality Adjust Variance to detect flow disturbances Adjust Sample volume SV to a low setting for better fl...

Page 178: ...anted low velocity blood flow and tissue movement In PW mode adjust Sample volume to low setting for better resolution or higher setting to more easily locate the disturbed flows Adjust the Compress setting to balance the effect of stronger and weaker echoes and obtain the desired intensity display Adjust Frequency to optimize flow display Higher setting will improve resolution and the lower setti...

Page 179: ...e examined 6 Press Select The instruction Size should be highlighted in the trackball status bar NOTE If the trackball control pointer is selected press trackball to be able to select between Position and Size controls 7 Use the trackball to adjust the dimension of the ROI 4 3 6 3 Adjust the TVI Controls To reduce quantification noise variance the Nyquist limit should be as low as possible without...

Page 180: ...e An application menu for the desired probe is listed on the screen 3 Trackball to the desired application Press Select to launch the application To change application without changing the current probe press Appl on the Operator Panel The selected application starts 4 Verify no missing channels All channels are functioning 5 Verify there s no EMI RFI or artifacts specific to the probe No EMI RFI ...

Page 181: ...16L0028 ECG Pads 3 pc or ECG simulator 4 3 8 3 ECG Check Table 4 6 ECG Check Step Task Expected Result s 1 Connect the ECG harness to the connector on the front of the system The unit displays a straight curve along the bottom edge of the image sector on the screen 2 Connect the three leads to a ECG simulator or Fasten the three ECG Pads to your body and connect the three leads to respective ECG P...

Page 182: ... is displayed default mode 4 3 9 3 Adjust the Cineloop controls 1 Press Freeze The left and right markers are displayed on either side of the last detected heart cycle on the ECG trace 2 Press 2D Freeze The selected heart beat is played back 3 Press 2D Freeze to freeze the cineloop Use the trackball to scroll through the acquisition and find the sequence of interest 4 Adjust Cycle select to move f...

Page 183: ...he internal printer is controlled from the P1 and P2 keys on the VIVID E9 s Operator Panel The factory default is P1 for the internal printer P2 for external network printer Table 4 7 Printer checks Step Task Expected Result s 1 When scanning in 2D Color Mode Press Freeze to stop image acquisition Image scanning stops with the last picture on the screen 2 Press P1 on the Operator Panel The image d...

Page 184: ...lect one of the Physical Print Buttons that you want to configure 8 In the right pane click on the service name you just created in the Services Tab 9 Click on the button This will place this service in the PrintFlow View for the printer button you selected 10 Click on Save You have now configured a printer service and attached it to a print button Now you can test the printer by pressing the prin...

Page 185: ...rve the busy light on the DVR unit or the busy icon on screen 2 Create a patient record or open an existing one 3 Press Record on the Operator Panel A red dot is displayed in the DVR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun NOTE A new title is created for each recording session 4 Press Record to toggle between pause and record NOTE When recording is resumed after pause a n...

Page 186: ...o change title or chapter 4 To find a patient record press Go to Search on the Touch Panel The Video Counter Search window is displayed 5 Select a title from the Recording title drop down menu and press Search counter Playback of the selected title is started Ejecting the DVD 1 Press Stop Eject twice to eject the disk The Finalize window is displayed 2 Select Yes The DVD is finalized and ejected F...

Page 187: ...cks function as intended 1 Press the right pedal to engage the front wheel brakes Apply a pressure on the scanner to verify that the brakes works as intended 2 Press the center pedal to release the front wheel brakes 3 Press the left pedal to engage the Swivel lock Ensure that the wheels lock making it impossible to turn the scanner to the sides 4 Press the center pedal to release the Swivel lock ...

Page 188: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 4 52 Section 4 4 Site Log Section 4 4 Site Log Table 4 9 Site Log DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Page 189: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 4 General procedures and Functional checks 4 53 Table 4 9 Site Log cont d DATE SERVICE PERSON PROBLEM COMMENTS ...

Page 190: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 4 54 Section 4 4 Site Log This page left blank to facilitate double sided printing ...

Page 191: ...em and the Common Service Desktop interface 5 1 2 Contents in this chapter 5 1 Overview 5 1 5 2 InSite ExC 5 4 5 3 VIVID E9 overview 5 9 5 4 Top Console with LCD monitor and Operator Panel 5 17 5 5 Main Console 5 24 5 6 Air Flow control 5 25 5 7 Casters and Brakes 5 26 5 8 Front End Processor FEP 5 27 5 9 Back End Processor BEP 5 52 5 10 Power distribution 5 77 5 11 Input and Output I O modules 5 ...

Page 192: ...w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA000950 Vivid E9 100 230V 4D Expert Option 19 LCD GB200001 BEP6 w 4D v104 3 4 or higher v112 0 7 or higher v112 1 x GB200003 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia Quadro 2000D v104 3 3 or higher v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA200890 BEP w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GB000040 Vivid E9 100 230V BT12 Pro Configuration 17 LCD GA200804 VE9 Card Rack Comple...

Page 193: ...890 or GA200800 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000830 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 17 LCD GA200804 VE9 Card Rack Complete w MLA4 GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000835 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 19 LCD GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110...

Page 194: ...ite ExC link at the bottom of the display screen 5 2 2 InSite ExC Icon The InSite ExC icon in the status bar change symbol and color depending on ongoing activity Clicking on the Icon brings up the InSite ExC menu Menu Choices Service Desktop Opens the Service Desktop on the VIVID E9 Request For Service Opens a service dispatch with GE Service Connect to GE Direct contact with GE Technical Support...

Page 195: ... Is Connected Yellow Icon InSite ExC activated and Technical Support can look around on your system see temperatures and voltage information see status get files stored with Alt D and look at logs but cannot perform any service related functions Disruptive State Online Center Is Connected Red Icon with clock InSite ExC activated Disrupted State Online Center Is Connected Red Icon with GE Logo InSi...

Page 196: ...the bottom of the display 2 Press the Right Trackball Set Key This opens of the RFS screen which sends a service dispatch directly to GE Service after you fill in the following information Items with a red asterisk Problem type Problem area Problem description Send 3 After you have completed filling in all of this information press Send to initiate the Request for Service Figure 5 3 Request for Se...

Page 197: ...t 1 DRX4_TOP DRX1 4 10 C 80 C If the temperature on any of the DRX cards rise above 80 C 176 F an ARFS is generated The lower temperature limit 10 C is outside the operating temperature for the product so the readings should never be as low as this temperature 2 Rack Fan 1 100 5000 RPM If the fan speed is lower than 100 RPM the fan has most likely stopped and an ARFS is generated The upper limit 5...

Page 198: ...rvice related functions depending on whether InSite has connected or not connected There are two Non Disruptive states If you see a black and white icon InSite ExC is activated but not open for Technical Support access If you see a yellow icon InSite ExC is activated and the Technical Support person can look around on your system but cannot perform any service related functions Connected InSite Ex...

Page 199: ...on The VIVID E9 ultrasound unit is a high performance digital ultrasound imaging system with total data management The system provides image generation in 4D 2D B Mode Color Doppler Power Doppler Angio M Mode Color M Mode PW and CW Doppler spectra Tissue Velocity imaging advanced Strain and Contrast applications The fully digital architecture of the VIVID E9 unit allows optimal usage of all scanni...

Page 200: ...red on the hard drive inside the Back End Processor BEP and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up A Physio module the Patient I O is incorporated in the Back End Processor BEP to provide ECG signals to synchronize cardiac ultrasound image acquisition Other analog signals from devices such as treadmills e g ECG and phono may also be processed by the Patient I O 5 3 4 VIVI...

Page 201: ...ds amplifies these signals Then the signals are routed to the DRX board s where the signals are A D converted The digital signals are then further processed on the DRX boards After amplification and digital signal processing in the Front End electronics the signal is transferred via the PCIe bus to the Back End Processor The Back End Processor receives input commands from the User Interface Operat...

Page 202: ...configuration is stored on a hard disk drive inside the Back End Processor At power up all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk drive 5 3 7 The electronics VIVID E9 internal electronics are divided into two card cages Front End Processor FEP The FEP is sometimes called Front End Card Cage Front End or only Card Cage Back End Processor BEP ...

Page 203: ...E HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 5 Components and functions theory 5 13 5 3 8 VIVID E9 interconnection diagram Figure 5 5 VIVID E9 w BEP6 interconnection diagram ...

Page 204: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 5 14 Section 5 3 VIVID E9 overview 5 3 8 VIVID E9 interconnection diagram cont d Figure 5 6 VIVID E9 w BEP5 interconnection diagram ...

Page 205: ... wall thickness when accurate timing information is required M mode is also known as T M mode or time motion mode Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display M mode displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam Depth is arranged along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis M mode is norm...

Page 206: ...modalities the other being CW Doppler In spectral Doppler blood flow is presented as a scrolling display with flow velocity on the Y axis and time on the X axis The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow while the absence of spectral broadening indicates laminar flow PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed Doppler signals This information describes the Doppler s...

Page 207: ...perator Panel with an ON OFF switch a touch screen and a switch board with controls for manipulating the picture quality and for use in Measure Analyze M A an alphanumeric keyboard QWERTY keyboard on a drawer below the switch board speakers for stereo sound output used during Doppler scanning replay 5 4 1 2 Connection between the Top Console and the rest of the VIVID E9 A flexible harness of elect...

Page 208: ...side the system assists in the Z axis vertical movement The brakes used for locking the Top Console s X and Y movement are operated by electrical motors 5 4 1 4 The XY Locking mechanism In addition to the brakes described above a Park Lock mechanism is used to lock the Top Console in the park position used during transportation Description of the Locking Mechanism Figure 5 7 shows the Park Lock wh...

Page 209: ...cked position on page 5 19 When the Operator Panel moves into locked position a micro switch 1 is activated The micro switch activation is used by the Motor Controller to detect when the Operator Panel is in locked position The XY frogleg brakes will stay ON if the VIVID E9 is powered down when the Operator Panel is locked This enables release of the Park Lock initiated by the micro switches on th...

Page 210: ...e block diagram MAIN CABLE TO FROM MAIN CONSOLE MAIN CABLE DVI VIDEO 48V POWER AUDIO USB FOR OP PANEL USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL UP DOWN BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES Cable List Cable Part Number Description E 5256600 VIDEO HDMI DVI CABLE LCD F 5196890 POWER USB CABLE LCD G 5248610 USB OP PANEL TO BULKHEAD 2x used U GA200311 UP DOWN BUTTONS 2x used W 5196592 Safety Ground Wire LCD Arm 2x used ...

Page 211: ... 2 Operator Panel Control Panel 5 4 2 1 Operator Panel general description The Operator Panel includes an On Off switch different controls for manipulating the picture quality and controls for use in Measure Analyze M A An alphanumeric keyboard is located on a drawer under the Operator Panel Figure 5 10 Operator Panel ...

Page 212: ...ional rotaries push buttons potentiometers etc It also connects to the touch panel overlay and handles the push events from this Additionally the custom keyboard also interfaces the trackball buttons These buttons generate events for both the trackball device and the custom keyboard Other functions of the custom keyboard are Volume control for the audio amplifier located in the host system LCD dis...

Page 213: ...SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 5 Components and functions theory 5 23 Figure 5 12 Top Console with Operator Panel block diagram TO FROM MAIN CONSOLE MAIN CABLE DVI VIDEO 48V POWER AUDIO USB FOR OP PANEL USB FOR VIDEO ON TOUCH PANEL UP DOWN BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES ...

Page 214: ...is drive is also used for software installation during a software upgrade The optional second DVD drive DVR is used to record and replay video captured by the Digital Video Stream Recorder option Power Supply Main LV Power Lifting mechanism for the Frog Leg and Top Console Rear handle Front and Rear Casters with lock and brake mechanism The Main Console consists of a frame that acts as the skeleto...

Page 215: ...Supply Temperature sensors several places inside VIVID E9 Temperature control software on the BEP 5 6 1 2 Software control Software running on the BEP samples the temperature on each sensor If the temperature rises fan speed and air flow is increased If the temperature decrease the fan speed decrease If the temperature increase over a pre defined level for each sensor the scanner will shut down It...

Page 216: ... has two major functions These are direction lock parking brake The third pedal is the release pedal used to release the two other functions if activated The direction lock and brake is operating on the front wheels A lever placed on each of the front wheels give the interface to the pedal mechanism These levers are engaged by rods being moved by a rotating bracket Bracket Rotation When the mechan...

Page 217: ...sition Do not change the color keys position Don t insert a card in the wrong position in the Card Rack If the power is turned on with a card placed in the wrong position the VIVID E9 will be destroyed Table 5 4 The Front End Processor Card Positions SHORT NAME COMPLETE NAME MAX QTY IN SYSTEM COMMENT GRLY RELAY BOARD 1 GRX RECEIVER BOARD 2 GTX TRANSMITTER BOARD 4 The number of cards in use vary by...

Page 218: ...DC 15 VDC 5 8 1 4 Input Pulser voltages TSV1P 0 VDC to 95 VDC TSV1N 0 VDC to 95 VDC TSV2P 0 VDC to 95 VDC TSV2N 0 VDC to 95 VDC These voltages comes from the Main Power Supply 5 8 1 5 Input signals RX signals from probes BEP to Card Rack Backplane Cable 5VDC to GFI 5 8 1 6 Bidirectional signals PCI Express cable control signals from the BEP digital data to the BEP BEP to Card Rack Backplane Cable ...

Page 219: ...he transmit trigger pulse TXTRIG_L The transmit pulses are routed via the Front Plane XD bus located on the front side of the GTX GRX and Relay boards to the Relay board where they are fed to the selected probe If the CW Doppler probe is selected one of the TX channels from the GTX is routed via the Back Plane to a separate connector then via a cable to the Doppler probe connector on the front of ...

Page 220: ...nd on the VIVID E9 model and options installed The reflected signal from body structures and blood cells are routed from the probe via the Relay Board and the Front Plane to the GRX receiver boards where pre amplification and Analog Time Gain Compensation ATGC is performed The gain is determined by an analog control signal ATGC generated by the Global Radio Frequency Interface board GFI The output...

Page 221: ...gh voltage multiplexer in linear probes In addition the GFI generates the transmit trigger pulse for GTX a receive synchronization pulse TXTRIG_L used by DRX a differential ATGC voltage used by GRX global 50 MHz and 200 MHz system clocks and Reset pulse SRES Test signal Dither signal Probe ATGC for 3V probe The output signals from the DRX is fed to the GFI for further signal processing The result ...

Page 222: ... systems requires 256 TX channels so four TX boards with 64 TX channels each are used Each channel from the TX boards is connected to 4 elements in the probe so we can transmit on 1024 elements 256 x 4 All other probes use 192 or less TX channels In this case three TX boards with 64 channels are used GTX TLP192 The GTX TLP192 contains 192 individually controlled transmit channels on one board and ...

Page 223: ... Transmit Pulse Generators TS Voltage 1 and TS Voltage 2 from the Main Power Supply supply the transmitters with the needed voltages to generate the correct ultrasound signals Figure 5 18 Block Diagram for the GTX board one channel illustrated FROM TSV1 2 TX_TRIG_L FROM GFI FE_BUS XD1 n TO RLY VIA XDBUS TSV1P TSV2P TSV2N TSV1N FROM GFI FRONT END INTERFACE TRANSMIT PULSE GEN TX MAIN POWER SUPPLY ...

Page 224: ...s BT 08 systems Figure 5 20 GTX TLP 3 0 boards location 192 TX channels BT 09 and some BT 11 systems CW PROBE CONNECTOR DC VOLTAGES TX PULSER VOLTAGES TO FROM BACK END PROCESSOR OPTIONAL VPD DRX GTX TLP 3 0 GRX 128 RELAY GRX 64 GTX TLP 3 0 GTX TLP 3 0 GTX TLP 3 0 DRX DRX DRX GFI GFI AUDIO BOUNDARY SCAN 5VDC MAIN POWER SUPPLY B A C K P L A N E FRONT PLANE TRANSDUCER BUS BOARD FRONT OF VIVID E9 CW P...

Page 225: ...VDC 5 8 3 4 Input TX Pulser voltages TSV1P 0 VDC to 95 VDC TSV1N 0 VDC to 95 VDC TSV2P 0 VDC to 95 VDC TSV2N 0 VDC to 95 VDC 5 8 3 5 Outputs Pulses sent via the Front Plane to the selected probe Figure 5 21 GTX TLP 192 board location 192 TX channels introduced 2011 CW PROBE CONNECTOR DC VOLTAGES TX PULSER VOLTAGES TO FROM BACK END PROCESSOR OPTIONAL VPD DRX GTX TLP 192 GRX 128 RELAY GRX 64 NOT USE...

Page 226: ...8_18 C4_18 U1_18 C7_18 C3_18 C25_17 C21_17 U2_17 C24_17 C20_17 C8_39 C4_39 U1_39 C7_39 C3_39 C714 C25_38 C21_38 U2_38 TP112 C24_38 C20_38 C8_36 C4_36 C7_36 C3_36 U1_36 C25_35 C21_35 U2_35 C24_35 C20_35 C8_33 C4_33 U1_33 C7_33 C3_33 C18_8 C19_8 R15_7 C16_7 R17_8 C22_8 R16_7 C17_7 R18_8 C33_6 R1_6 C2_6 C1_6 R31_6 R2_6 C5_6 R32_6 C34_6 C18_5 C16_4 R17_5 C19_5 C22_5 R15_4 R16_4 R18_5 C17_4 C2_3 C1_3 R...

Page 227: ...one ON OFF DS18 GREEN CPLD IF_FPGA init ON OFF DS1 GREEN IF_FPGA GTXIF_DAVID_ERROR_sig 0 OFF OFF FPGA DAVID ERROR DS2 GREEN IF_FPGA GTXIF_DAVID_ERROR_sig 1 OFF OFF FPGA DAVID ERROR DS3 GREEN IF_FPGA GTXIF_DAVID_ERROR_sig 2 OFF OFF FPGA DAVID ERROR DS4 GREEN IF_FPGA GTXIF_DAVID_ERROR_sig 3 OFF OFF FPGA DAVID ERROR DS5 GREEN IF_FPGA ctrlRegFFF0out 0 OFF OFF DS6 RED IF_FPGA Txtrig_n_sig 0 ON OFF DS7 ...

Page 228: ...Q6 TP1 C147 S3 FL3 R50 R52 R20 F2 R101 TP9 R22 R3 U18 100 25 26 U13 TP13 TP7 R111 TP6 C46 K228 K229 K230 C144 K180 K190 K181 K182 C135 K116 K126 K117 K118 C98 R102 TP10 R103 C117 U17 CR1 U15 Q10 K233 K234 K235 K253 K201 K202 K193 K203 K137 K138 K129 K139 R12 R11 K85 K166 K86 C130 K100 K53 K102 K54 C83 R98 R99 C113 U35 Q11 Q7 U34 C37 TP8 U12 R71 R21 Y1 75 76 R63 50 51 K217 K218 K219 K22 K169 K170 K...

Page 229: ...C Voltages 15VDC 6VDC 6VDC 15VDC 100V PMXVPP Voltage for Probe MUX 100V PMXVNN Voltage for Probe MUX Voltages provided by regulators on the board 12 VDC 5 VDC 3 3 VDC 3 3 VDC 5 VDC and LVDC 3 3 V 2 5A for RT3D probe 5 8 4 4 Input Signals Transmit period XMIT Pulses via the XD_BUS Receive period Echo signals from the selected probe 5 8 4 5 Output Signals Transmit period XMIT Pulses to the selected ...

Page 230: ... K240 C145 K195 K207 K208 K196 S6 K131 K143 K144 K132 FL2 D10 D9 C38 R54 R55 Q6 TP1 C147 S3 FL3 R50 R52 R20 F2 R101 TP9 R22 R3 U18 100 25 26 U13 TP13 TP7 R111 TP6 C46 K228 K229 K230 C144 K180 K190 K181 K182 C135 K116 K126 K117 K118 C98 R102 TP10 R103 C117 U17 CR1 U15 Q10 K233 K234 K235 K253 K201 K202 K193 K203 K137 K138 K129 K139 R12 R11 K85 K166 K86 C130 K100 K53 K102 K54 C83 R98 R99 C113 U35 Q11...

Page 231: ...e Amplification on the echo signals To support 192 analog receiving channels from the probes two different GRX boards are used in VIVID E9 64 Channel Receiver board without analog CW Doppler 128 Channel Receiver board with analog CW Doppler The 128 channel Receiver board also include the needed circuits to demodulate the CW Doppler signals from a Pedof probe NOTE Some probes like the 3V and 4V are...

Page 232: ...C 15 VDC 5 8 5 4 Outputs After Time Variable Amplification the analog signals are sent via high level analog differential lines to the DRX board for A D conversion and beamforming When using the Pedof probe the demodulated Doppler signals are sent to the DRX board for A D conversion 5 8 5 5 LEDs on the GRX board The GRX board has four LEDs Figure 5 28 GRX location 2 pc GRX boards ...

Page 233: ... the Relay Board are routed via these boards Two different Front Plane boards have been used The first model B supporting up to four TX cards with 64 channels each was used from the introduction of VIVID E9 In August 2011 a new Front Plane board model A supporting the TX card with 192 TX channels was phased into production 5 8 6 2 Location in the Unit The Front Plane boards plugs into the connecto...

Page 234: ...om 64 channels into streams of digital data and 2 Receive signal beamforming The DRX performs optimal range dependent focusing and steering to create multiple receive beams simultaneously Up to four DRX boards with 64 receiver channels each can be used to support up to 256 receiver channels Today we are using three DRX boards to support 192 receiver channels 5 8 7 2 Location in the Unit Figure 5 3...

Page 235: ...signal data to next DRX Data from the last DRX card is sent to GFI 5 8 7 6 LEDs on the DRX board the Nathan field The Nathan field has an array of LEDs that display Nathan status There is one green LED per Nathan as well as one common red LED per Nathan row The leds are arranged as follows Each Nathan drives two signals connected to LEDs a green running light and a red error status light Figure 5 ...

Page 236: ...t column will turn ON then the LEDs in the next column are lit then the LEDs in the third column and at last the LEDs in the fourth row Next the sequence will repeat If the card starts the voltages are OK If it is artifacts in the picture during scanning you may try to interchange the position for the DRX boards and scan again If the artifacts moves to the left or to the right it indicates an erro...

Page 237: ... from the BEP s hard drive via the PCI Express bus to the GFI2 board When a scanning mode is selected or scanning parameters are adjusted the GFI board receives setup parameters from the BEP and pass these on to the FE boards The GFI also based on some of these parameters control some front end signals directly The digitized and beamformed ultrasound data received from the DRX boards are further p...

Page 238: ...the Back Plane as the right most board in the FE rack 5 8 8 3 Input DC Voltages 24 DC from Main LV Power via FEP Backplane 15 VDC 6VA DC BEP5V Other needed voltages are generated locally on the GFI 5 8 8 4 Clocks These clocks are generated on the board 200 MHz for on board GFI use 200 50 MHz for the RX board 200 MHz for the RX board Figure 5 34 GFI2 location GFI2 BOARD ...

Page 239: ...N 1V2 STATUS LIT DS6 GREEN DRX1 LIT IF DRX 1 IS MISSING DARK BEFORE STARTUP DARK IF THE FPGAs ON THE BOARDS HAVE NOT BEEN SUCCESSFULLY PROGRAMMED DS7 GREEN DRX2 LIT IF DRX 2 IS MISSING DS8 GREEN DRX3 LIT IF DRX 3 IS MISSING DS9 GREEN DRX4 LIT IF DRX 4 IS MISSING DS10 GREEN GTX1 LIT IF GTX 1 IS MISSING DS11 GREEN GTX2 LIT IF GTX 2 IS MISSING DS12 GREEN GTX3 LIT IF GTX 3 IS MISSING DS13 GREEN GTX4 L...

Page 240: ...fferent boards Control signals and Clocks are distributed from the GFI board to the other boards Low amplitude analog signals from GRX board to DRX board Data signals are routed from DRX board to GFI board The BSCAN signals GFI Audio 5V from GFI and I2C signals are routed to the BEP and or External I O depending on the BEP model in use The only active electronics on the FEP Backplane is a I2 C mem...

Page 241: ... REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 5 Components and functions theory 5 51 5 8 9 2 Location in the unit The FEP Backplane is attached to the rear side of the Front End Card Rack Figure 5 36 FEP Backplane location FEP BACKPLANE ...

Page 242: ...he following BEP models have been used for VIVID E9 BEP6 was introduced in manufacturing in October 2012 The BEP6 is also called BEPY3 BEP5 was introduced at the introduction of VIVID E9 and was phased out of manufacturing in October November 2012 BEP5 has also been called BEPY1 or BEPY2 depending on the installed System Software version 5 9 3 Signal Flow and Processing The Back End Processor rece...

Page 243: ...SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 5 Components and functions theory 5 53 5 9 4 Location of the Back End Processor BEP The BEP is located on the left side inside the scanner see Figure 5 37 Figure 5 37 Back End Processor THE BEP IS LOCATED BEHIND THIS LEFT SIDE COVER ...

Page 244: ... FROM MAIN PWR SUPPLY SATA SATA IO BOARD MOTHERBOARD LED AUX PHONO ECG BEP6 w 4D and DVR USB POWER PATIENT IO LED LED FRONT PANEL FROM MAIN PWR SUPPLY CONTROL SIGNAL TO MAIN PWR SUPPLY DVI Video Audio 2xUSB 48V Power ON OFF switch Safety GND Outer Boss Brake Motor Brake Commands IPASS2 PCIE x1 TO GFI FEP BACKPLANE CONNECTOR TO FEP BACKPLANE AND TO GFI VOLTAGE FROM POWER SUPPLY CONTROL SIGNAL TO PO...

Page 245: ... supply for local voltages A motherboard with RAM a processor and PCI connectors for extension cards An I O board on the rear of the BEP 5 9 6 2 Outside the EMC Enclosure House Front Panel with status lights LEDs for hard disk activity and network speed upper LED and network activity lower LED Patient I O with AUX Phono and ECG connectors BEP I O Board Figure 5 40 Front Panel ...

Page 246: ...Y 9 13 48V 17 22 25 GND 18 PWR_LED_P 21 PWR_LED_N 5 Test Connector Factory Test Pins of note 5 13 23 Ground 3 24V 4 48V 8 12V 9 5V 10 AC_FAIL_N 11 3 3V 12 5V_STDBY 16 Not Used on Vivid E9 24 PWR_SW 25 PSON_N 6 J100 OP Panel Video USB 7 J7 OP Panel Buttons USB 8 J28 XYZ Motor USB 9 J27 Spare USB 10 J26 BW Printer USB 11 J25 Spare USB 12 J4 Main PS USB USB 13 J14 Spare USB 14 J29 Power to peripheral...

Page 247: ...connections cont d Table 5 10 BEP6 Top connections ITEM DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION 1 J1 Main PS 48V 5V In 2 J5 Front End Rack PCIe to GFI Table 5 11 BEP6 Rear connections ITEM DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION 1 J40 Customer USB 2 J41 Customer USB 3 J46 LAN 10 100 1000 Mbit 4 J44 Customer Video Out 5 J43 Customer Audio 6 J42 Customer Audio 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 248: ...or BEP 5 9 8 BEP5 Face and Top connections Please refer to the illustrations Figure 5 41 BEP5 Face connections Figure 5 42 BEP5 Top connections Sub woofer PCI Express to GFI SATA to DVD Main PS 48VDC 5VSB Power OK USB to Main PS PCI Express to GFI SATA to DVD Main PS 48VDC 5VSB Power OK USB to Main PS ...

Page 249: ...SB distribution USB is used to communicate with and or control many functions and devices in the VIVID E9 The illustration below shows how the USB signals are distributed in BEP6 The illustration below shows how the USB signals are distributed in BEP5 Figure 5 43 USB distribution in BEP6 Figure 5 44 USB distribution in BEP5 ...

Page 250: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 5 60 Section 5 9 Back End Processor BEP 5 9 8 2 SATA distribution BEP6 Figure 5 45 BEP6 SATA distribution ...

Page 251: ...s and functions theory 5 61 5 9 8 3 Use of Expansion Slots on BEP6 Motherboard Use of Expansion Slots listed from the rightmost slot BEP 6 0 Power Board Assembly Graphics Adapter Video Card DVR Board Optional The I O Board is plugged into a double slot on the left side of the notherboard ...

Page 252: ...rt beep will last only 1 second BIOS also uses beeps of different frequency to indicate critical errors If BIOS detects that the CPU is overheating it may play a high pitched repeating beep while the computer is running Table 5 12 BEP Beep Codes Beep Code Meaning Possible Cause 1 Long 2 Short Video adapter failure Bad video adapter Repeating Endless loop Memory error Bad memory or bad connection 1...

Page 253: ...RECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 5 Components and functions theory 5 63 5 9 9 Input DC Voltages NOTE The BEP is not connected to AC power The BEP gets it power supply via the BEP Power Supply ...

Page 254: ...E MANUAL 5 64 Section 5 9 Back End Processor BEP 5 9 10 Input Signals BEP6 Audio signal path GFI FEP Backplane BEP6 MBD a and b a IO Board Audio Out b DVR BEP5 Audio signal path GFI FEP Backplane BEP IO Board Audio Out BEP Motherboard Figure 5 46 Audio map BEP6 ...

Page 255: ...outed via printed circuits on the cards No cables are used Table 5 14 BEP5 Bi directional Signals Signal Name Description Signal Path PCIe PCI Express J3 BEP Motherboard Cable 4 inside BEP J5 BEP PCI Express Cable GFI BSCAN Boundary Scan GTX DRX GFI Card Rack FEP Motherboard Cable N I O Board USB Network 10 100 1000 Mbit BEP Motherboard Cable 12 J46 Rear Panel Table 5 15 Output Signals Signal Name...

Page 256: ...LEDs 5 9 13 1 LEDs on the BEP5 BEP6 Front Figure 5 47 Front Panel Table 5 16 LEDs on the BEP s front ITEM LED NAME DESCRIPTION 1 ACT LED HD ACTIVITY Blinks when the Hard Disk drive is active 2 SPD LED NETWORK SPEED 10MBit No Light 100 MBit Amber Light 1000 Mbit Green Light 3 ACT LED NETWORK ACTIVITY Lit green 1 2 3 ...

Page 257: ...y 5 67 5 9 13 2 LEDs on the BEP6 s Front Cover Table 5 17 LEDs on the BEP6 s Front Cover DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION The LEDs for the BEP6 s Power Supply can be viewed without removing the BEP6 s Front Cover Description of the LEDs listed from the top ATX POWER OK POWER ON 3 3V 5 5V STBY 28V 5V POWER OK 48V 12V ...

Page 258: ...king Green Amber or OFF Hub3 OK Error Green LED means OK Blinking Green Amber or OFF Hub2 OK Error Green LED means OK Blinking Green Amber or OFF MC OK Error Green LED means USB micro controller is OK Blinking Green Amber or OFF Table 5 19 LEDs at the USB connectors LED NAME OK LED ERROR LED J7 USB LEDs Lit green Blinking Green Amber or OFF J28 USB LEDs Lit green Blinking Green Amber or OFF J27 US...

Page 259: ... Power Supply Dedicated control signals are used for controlling the BEP Power Supply 5 9 14 2 BEP6 Power Supply Block Diagram Table 5 20 BEP6 Power Supply Block Diagram ITEM DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION 1 This connector is not used in the VIVID E9 2 PCN 2 48 VDC from Main Power Supply POWER CABLE BEP 48V GA200715 connector J1 on top of BEP6 PCN 2 Control signals ACFAIL and 5V STBY 3 PCN 3 This plug f...

Page 260: ...y Block Diagram 5 9 14 4 Location in the BEP6 The BEP6 Power Supply Card is located inside the BEP6 at the right hand side when opening the BEP Figure 5 49 BEP5 Power Supply Block Diagram Figure 5 50 BEP6 Power Supply Card location MAIN POWER SUPPLY TO BEP MOTHERBOARD HDD SATA POWER TO I O BOARD TO PATIENT I O BEP6 POWER SUPPLY CARD ...

Page 261: ... 5 9 14 5 Location in the BEP5 The BEP Power Supply is located inside at the top of the BEP5 5 9 14 6 Input Voltage BEP6 BEP5 48 VDC from the Main Power Supply 5 9 14 7 Input Signals BEP6 BEP5 48V_OK from Main Power Supply 5 9 14 8 Bi directional Signals None Figure 5 51 BEP5 Power Supply Location BEP5 POWER SUPPLY ...

Page 262: ...on of the LEDs refer to the label on the BEP6 s Front Cover or to 5 9 13 2 LEDs on the BEP6 s Front Cover on page 5 67 5 9 14 11 LEDs on BEP5 Power Supply Several LEDs are viewable through cut outs in the BEP Power supply Figure 5 52 LEDs Table 5 21 LEDs POSITION LED POWER OFF POWER ON COMMENTS 1 PWR OK OFF LIT 2 12V OFF LIT 3 3 3V OFF LIT 4 5V OFF LIT 5 12V 2 OFF LIT 6 12V 1 OFF LIT 7 48V OK OFF ...

Page 263: ...Test Points are available through cut outs in the BEP Power supply NOTICE Be careful so you don t short circuit the signals when placing the test probe s Figure 5 53 Test Points on BEP5 Power Supply Table 5 22 Test Points Test Point COMMENTS 48V AGND Analog Ground ACC3V3 SDA ND SCL PSON PWR OK 12V 3 3V 5V 12V 2 12V 1 48V OK PGND Power Ground 48V IN FPO PSON 5Vstdby ...

Page 264: ...tor for connection to the BEP5 Motherboard The IO Board is interfaceing between the BEP and the connectors on the rear side of VIVID E9 video audio USB BEP and the Top Console BEP and the internal printer Audio for the speakers the rear plugs and the DVR BEP5 I O ONLY Boundary Scan from the BEP to boards in the Front End Card Rack 5 9 15 2 Location in the unit At the rear of the BEP with the Rear ...

Page 265: ...EDs on the BEP5 Rear Panel Two LEDs are located to the right for each USB connector The upper LED next to a USB connector is USB connected and in use Lit green The lower LED next to a USB connector is USB activity Lit green NOTE The BEP6 Rear Panel doesn t have any LEDs Figure 5 54 LEDs on the BEP5 Rear Panel R L 5180173 rev1 ...

Page 266: ...s Adapter is located in the PCI Express slot PCI Express x16 inside the BEP cabinet 5 9 16 3 Input Signals Graphics data from the BEP via the BEP s motherboard 5 9 16 4 Output Signals DVI to the LCD screen main screen Video to the external output on the rear of VIVID E9 5 9 17 Internal Storage Devices VIVID E9 has these internal storage devices SATA Serial ATA Hard Disk Drive HDD inside the Back E...

Page 267: ...eral description The Main Power Supply s main task is to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System and to supply the various internal subsystems with AC or DC power Figure 5 55 Main Power Supply Principle MLP Line Filter Rectifier Inrush Current Limiter PFC Stand By 5Vstb 12W 24V 24V 48V 48V 15V 12V 6V TLP 0 95V 0 95V 2X20W IEC60601 1 Isolation 400V 90 250Vac 0 140V 0 14...

Page 268: ... DC power with several voltages 24 VDC 15 VDC 11 VDC 6V VDC Front End Rack TXPSV1 and TXPSV2 for the transmitters Front End Rack PMXVOUT for the probe channel multiplexers Back End Processor 48 VDC Operator Panel LCD XYZ motors 48 VDC Figure 5 56 Main Power Supply block diagram 02725 175 5 219 57 56 32 5 725 255 7 21 62 7 21 1 9 19 57 5 21752 0 1 32 5 6833 72 35 17 56 DC VOLTGES FEP S MOTHERBOARD ...

Page 269: ...a male plug to the wall outlet 5 10 2 2 Temperature Control The Main Power Supply is equipped with an internal fan with variable speed for temperature control Both the temperature of the air entering the power supply and leaving the power supply are measured The fan is controlled by software 5 10 2 3 Input Mains Power 110 VAC or 230 VAC 50 60 Hz Figure 5 57 Main Power Supply Figure 5 58 L1 Mains I...

Page 270: ...es on the BEP The USB is used to set the power supply to the correct transmit XD voltages Table 5 24 Power outputs sheet 1 of 2 CONNECTOR DESCRIPTION COMMENTS P2 115 VAC OUT ON TWO CONNECTORS PERIPHERALS B W PRINTER P3 Card Rack Connector FRONT END PROCESSOR The TSON_STRB signal is a watchdog for the Transmit Signal TS P4 Card Rack Connector FRONT END PROCESSOR EXT_SYNC is a 200kHz clock coming fr...

Page 271: ...ny of the outputs are overloaded Over voltage Protection is provided for these voltages 3 3 V 5 Vd 5 Va 15 Va Voltage will be turned off if the temperature grows too high temperature watch dog P5 48 VDC BACK END PROCESSOR AND MOTOR POWER The 48V_OK indicates that the 48 VDC measured on the BEP is OK The 5Vstb is always ON and is connected to the BEP s motherboard and to the light in the ON OFF but...

Page 272: ...position Connect the mains power to the VIVID E9 and switch AC Breaker to ON position The fans inside the Main Power Supply starts on a high speed and then settle to a lower speed 5V_STB 5V DC Standby power to BEP is turned on It also gives power to the ON OFF switch on the OP so it can be used Figure 5 59 AC Breaker turned ON 100 230 VAC AC POWER BREAKER FILTER INRUSH LIMIT IEC SHIELD DC DC 5V_ST...

Page 273: ...s and functions theory 5 83 5 10 3 2 AC Breaker to ON position cont d The 5Vstdby LED is lit green The ON OFF switch on the OP is lit amber color One green LED LED 1 on the BEP s motherboard is lit Figure 5 60 LEDs on BEP6 Power Supply standby Figure 5 61 LEDs on BEP5 Power Supply standby ...

Page 274: ...t sequence The fans below the Front End Card Rack starts The lights in the alphanumeric keyboard and in the Lower OP panel are turned on AC Power to the B W printer is turned on Figure 5 62 ON has been depressed 100 230 VAC AC POWER BREAKER FILTER INRUSH LIMIT IEC SHEELD DC DC 5V_STB SINEWAVE GENERATOR DC DC 115 VAC CONVERTERS USB uP 48V BEP B W PRINTER MOTOR CONTROLLER TX1 TX2 FEP 24V 15V 11V 6V ...

Page 275: ...soon as the BEP Power Supply gets power from the Main Power Supply the different voltages needed for the BEP are turned on and the BEP starts to boot 1 The BIOS is loaded 2 Then the DVD drive is checked for a bootable disc 3 The BEP starts to load the current System Software from the HDD and then the current Application Software 4 As soon as the software has been loaded either a 2D screen is displ...

Page 276: ...ibed below 5 10 4 2 Power Down Press the ON OFF button for a short time 1 BEP detects the contact of Power ON OFF switch 2 PSON_N goes high This trigs the Main Power Supply to shut down the output voltages 3 Controller ACFAIL_N output signal goes low 4 Controller TS_OK output signal goes low 5 Controller turns OFF the TS Transmit voltages 6 Controller turns OFF the PMX Probe MUX voltages 7 Control...

Page 277: ...shut down the output voltages 3 Controller ACFAIL_N output signal goes low 4 Controller TS_OK output signal goes low 5 Controller turns OFF the TS Transmit voltages 6 Controller turns OFF the PMX Probe MUX voltages 7 Controller turns OFF voltages 15 6 11V 24V 8 ACFAIL_N output signal goes high 9 Controller turns OFF 48V 5 10 4 4 Power Loss A power loss may be due to The Mains Switch has been switc...

Page 278: ...eral description NOTE The ECG functionality of the Patient I O module is not intended for patient monitoring nor to support alarm functionality This input is intended as a tool for easier synchronization of images and cineloop control during ultrasound examinations The Patient I O panel is located on the front of VIVID E9 The Patient IO contains the electronics for Phono ECG Respiration Analog inp...

Page 279: ...he scanned image that is displayed is synchronized with the ECG respiration and phono traces In M Mode or Doppler the traces are synchronized to that particular mode s sweep The operator can control the gain the position and the sweep rate of the traces using the assignable controls AUX is capable of handling a pulse pressure signal 5 11 2 2 Patient I O Location in the Unit The Patient I O is loca...

Page 280: ...able below The AUX is default a 1 Vpp Volt peak to peak input with a max frequency of 300 Hz It has a programmable high gain mode with a maximum input signal of 300 mVpp millivolt peak to peak The inputs are differential For a single ended sensor signal the pin 1 input should be connected to the GND of the sensor Table 5 25 DC input pinout on the Patient I O Module CONNECTOR SIGNAL NAME DC INPUT P...

Page 281: ...s theory 5 91 5 11 2 5 Patient I O outputs USB2 Digital Trace Data Module ID PROM communication Pinout for the USB outlet on the Patient I O module Table 5 27 USB outlet on the Patient I O Module CONNECTOR SIGNAL NAME USB 2 Pin 1 5V NOT USED BY PATIENT I O Pin 2 D Pin 3 D Pin 4 GND Pin 5 GND 5 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 282: ...ar IO the OP and to internal units printer and Patient IO It distributes SATA to the DVD s It splits video between the main monitor and rear video output It also distributes audio to speakers and rear connectors Figure 5 66 BEP6 s I O Board Block Diagram MAIN CABLE VIDEO MAIN CABLE POWER AUDIO SATA CABLE DVD1 SATA CABLE DVD2 MAIN CABLE USB MAIN CABLE USB USB CABLE XYZ CONTROLLER USB CABLE BW PRINT...

Page 283: ...gh Two USB ports for the Rear IO One USB port for internal B W printer One USB port for XYZ Controller Some unused USB ports Doppler audio orginating on the GFI board Doppler audio mixed with Windows system sounds from BEP s motherboard DVI I input from the BEP from the Graphics Adapter or onboard video controller or from the DVR Board 5 11 3 4 Output signals 12V DC and 5V DC for Patient IO DVD dr...

Page 284: ...ce between the BEP and the rest of the system It contains three USB hubs and it splits video between the main monitor and rear video output It also distributes audio to speakers and rear connectors 5 11 4 2 Location in the Unit The I O board is located inside the BEP with some connectors available on the rear of the system Figure 5 67 BEP5 s I O Board Block Diagram To OP Panel XYZ Motor Spare ...

Page 285: ...ut from the video card or DVR Board AC Fail and PSON_N signal from the BEP PS 5 11 4 4 Output signals 12V DC and 5V DC for Patient IO DVD drive and High capacity drive 5V STDBY from the BEP power supply card for OPIO Pass through USB ports for Color and BW printer 3 x USB ports Spare Audio Line In to the Motherboard Audio to DVR board on Motherboard Audio to the OP Panel for the speakers External ...

Page 286: ...om the front of the VIVID E9 5 12 1 2 Digital Video Stream Recorder DVR Option This is a kit with a Video Recorder Card inside the BEP and a DVD R W unit used for export of the recorded video The DVD R W unit is available from the front of the VIVID E9 NOTE The DVD drive used for video recording supports DVD R W 5 12 1 3 Black White Digital Graphic Printer The B W Printer is available from the fro...

Page 287: ...ements only USB Flash Cards tested for use with VIVID E9 may be used For a list of available USB Flash Cards see 9 15 6 USB Flash Card on page 9 69 The following USB Flash Cards USB Memory keys have also been tested and approved for use with Vivid E9 Vivid 7 but are out of stock USB Memory Key 2GB Trancend USB2 0 The following USB Flash Cards approved for Vivid 7 may also be used on the VIVID E9 b...

Page 288: ... time NOTE To be able to use an USB storage device like this Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard Drive on a Vivid E9 the Vivid E9 may need a BIOS upgrade A CD with the new BIOS software is included in the kit Verification and installation instructions are included in the Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard Drive Installation Manual Direction Number EY194147 NOTE To be able to use an USB storage device like this...

Page 289: ... and service the VIVID E9 scanner is collected in the documents described in this section 5 13 1 User documentation VIVID E9 User Manual User Guide Special Probes User Guide 5 13 2 Service documentation VIVID E9 Service Manual VIVID E9 Unpacking Packing Procedure For a list of available product manuals for VIVID E9 see Section 9 22 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 on page 9 97 ...

Page 290: ...g sections contain a brief introduction of iLinq s features 5 14 3 1 Web Server Browser The Service Platform and other Service software use the iLinq web server and the Internet Explorer browser 5 14 3 2 Connectivity NOTE This feature that allow the customer to contact the GE OnLine Center are available for Warranty and Contract customers only This feature provides basic connectivity between the s...

Page 291: ...ionalization The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only There is no multi lingual capability built into the Service Interface 5 14 4 2 Service Login Select the phone icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen This icon links the user or the Field Engineer FE to the service login screen ...

Page 292: ...r use Every access request whether successful or not will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users Section 5 15 Restart VIVID E9 after diagnostics Always shutdown the system and reboot after a diagnostics session Table 5 28 Access Authorization USER LEVEL ACCESS AUTHORIZATION PASSWORD Operator Authorized access to specified diagnostics error logs and utilities Same ...

Page 293: ...This chapter describes how to adjustments the VIVID E9 6 1 2 Contents in this chapter 6 1 Overview 6 1 6 2 LCD Monitor adjustments 6 2 6 3 Test the LCD Arm and LCD Monitor range of motion 6 4 6 4 Backlight adjustment 6 5 6 5 Touch Screen Calibration 6 10 6 6 DC Offset Calibration Front End Alignment 6 11 6 7 Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism 6 12 6 8 Adjust time out for DICOM servers 6 17 ...

Page 294: ...gs have been optimized at the factory so normally there should be no need for any further adjustments Default Brightness for the 19 LCD screen on VIVID E9 is 89 Under special light conditions you may want to adjust the LCD screen s Brightness NOTE Adjustments on the monitor will influence all modes If you only want to change the settings for one mode please refer to Section 6 4 Backlight adjustmen...

Page 295: ... access Utilities Test Patterns to review the test patterns Figure 6 2 LCD Controls Advanced Menu Table 6 1 Advanced Menu MENU PARAMETER DEFAULT SETTING Screen Smoothing 1 2 3 4 5 3 Return Color Brightness 0 100 89 Contrast 0 100 100 Temperature Custom 9000K 11000K 13000K 15000K 9000K Gamma 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 4 Gain R G B 0 100 Adjusted value at the factory Reset Return Other Screen Siz...

Page 296: ...sition Figure 6 3 Too tight If the customer finds the LCD difficult to move from a vertical to horizontal position use a 17mm wrench to loosen nuts at hinge Be sure to loosen both sides equally Start with 1 4 turn and test full 90 degree movement before loosening more Too loose If the customer finds the LCD does not remain in place after adjusting the LCD from a vertical to horizontal position use...

Page 297: ...t adjustment 6 4 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to adjust the backlight on the 17 LCD monitor 6 4 2 Cautions and Warnings N A 6 4 3 Accessing the Main LCD and Touch Screen Backlight Adjustments 1 Select Utility on the Touch Screen 2 Ensure that Page 1 of 2 is selected Figure 6 5 Utility screen page 1 ...

Page 298: ...st the left most rotary to adjust the LCD Backlight Push and adjust the left most rotary to adjust the LCD Blue Tint Adjust the second rotary from the left side to adjust the Touch Panel TP Backlight 6 4 5 Adjust LCD Brightness and Contrast Select Page 2 of 2 on the Utility screen Adjust the left most rotary to adjust the Main LCD s Brightness Push and adjust the left most rotary to adjust the Mai...

Page 299: ... Test Images Select Page 2 of 2 on the Utility screen Turn the second rotary from the left side to select between the Test Images The Test Images are reproduced in Table 6 2 Figure 6 8 Select Test Image Table 6 2 Test Images sheet 1 of 3 TEST IMAGE No TEST IMAGES DESCRIPTION 1 Test Standard 2 Test Red grades ...

Page 300: ... REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 6 8 Section 6 4 Backlight adjustment 3 Test Green grades 4 Test Blue grades 5 Blue Circle on Black background 6 Black Table 6 2 Test Images cont d sheet 2 of 3 TEST IMAGE No TEST IMAGES DESCRIPTION ...

Page 301: ... HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 6 Service adjustments 6 9 7 White 8 Straight Line Table 6 2 Test Images cont d sheet 3 of 3 TEST IMAGE No TEST IMAGES DESCRIPTION ...

Page 302: ...ork Follow these steps to calibrate the Touch screen 1 Select Calibrate The Touch screen goes blank and display a cross in the screen s upper left corner 2 Point your finger on the centre of the cross and press slightly This calibrates this point and the cross moves to the screen s upper right corner 3 Point your finger on the centre of the cross and press slightly This calibrates this point and t...

Page 303: ...stalling a new VIVID E9 after software has been updated or replaced when DRX boards have been interchanged when a DRX board has been replaced when the Back End Processor has been replaced 6 6 3 Front End Alignment Procedure The Front End Alignment is available on the Common Service Desktop interface 1 Disconnect all probes 2 Power on the VIVID E9 3 Select the InSite ExC icon GE phone icon on the s...

Page 304: ... brakes in the froglegs to allow easy movement When the lock button is pressed and the console is pushed back into the locked position the U bolt mechanically engages the park lock similar to a car door Pushing the lock button does not affect the locking action of the park lock it only releases the brakes to allow the OP to get pushed into the park lock easier But the lock button must be pushed to...

Page 305: ...the XY Assembly This is the adjustment screw NOTE When turning the hex screw do not exceed half turn increments Overtightening will prevent the console from locking into place and too loose will make the console loose 2 Use a 3 mm hex tool to rotate the adjustment screw clockwise to tighten the XY Lock For optimal adjustment rotate the adjustment screw 1 4 turn and test the Lock function Repeat pr...

Page 306: ...m 6 7 3 XY Manual Release for Lock and Brake Mechanism and Adjustment The following procedure is intended to release and adjust the XY mechanism 6 7 3 1 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts Figure 6 13 XY Lock and Brake Mechanism Parts 1 U bolt 2 Brakes one inside each of the four XY arms 3 Park Lock engages U bolt ...

Page 307: ...re if the park lock is not working or the lock does not respond when pressing the Frogleg Controls 1 Release the lock manually 2 Remove the four screws Item 1 The screws s heads are marked with red color in the figure below NOTICE Be aware of the fragile power cable and do not pull the Park Lock out with force It should fall out by just guiding Figure 6 14 Remove the Park Lock ...

Page 308: ...his occurred in some earlier systems The nut and retainer did not return to the charged mode after unlock By hand rotate the Threaded Lead Screw on the actuator 4 counterclockwise until the Lock Nut is barely touching the Bearing Housing 5 The two small plastic springs should just touch but do not deform Make sure the Park Lock Lever 3 is loose and can engage and hold the Lock Wheel 6 in locked po...

Page 309: ...onsole into the locked position until the lock is engaged Not apply any weight on the console or lean on it If the console is not in the normal resting position the lock will not engage when trying to park it 6 7 5 Adjusting the Z mechanism There are no adjustments for the Operator Panel s vertical movement Related information 4 2 3 6 Moving the Top Console up or down when Power is OFF on page 4 1...

Page 310: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 6 18 Section 6 7 Adjusting the XYZ Mechanism This page left blank to facilitate double sided printing ...

Page 311: ... system operation Basic host system and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied Some Service Tools may be run at the application level 7 1 2 Contents in this chapter 7 1 Overview 7 1 7 2 Service Safety Considerations 7 2 7 3 FAQ Frequently Asked Questions 7 2 7 4 Troubleshooting Tips 7 4 7 5 Network Connectivity Troubleshooting 7 8 7 6 Gathering Troubleshooting Data 7 10 7 7 Scre...

Page 312: ...d at start up of the VIVID E9 and is repeated at specific pre defined intervals 7 3 2 Reset the BEP from a Hang Question It seems that the BEP is hanging it s not responding at all How do I Reset it Answer 1 Try this method first Press the ON OFF switch on the Operator Panel for more than six seconds This should cause the VIVID E9 to perform a Forced Restart 2 If the instruction in step 1 didn t h...

Page 313: ... There is a lever behind the openings in the Rear Cover Press the lever to the right to release the X Y brakes At the same time push the Upper Console down If you stop to press the lever the Z brakes engage For more information see 4 2 3 6 Moving the Top Console up or down when Power is OFF on page 4 13 Question How to release the XY brakes when without power Answer See the instructions in 4 2 3 5...

Page 314: ...1 Shortcuts SHORTCUT DESCRIPTION Alt B BOOKMARK PLACE A BOOKMARK IN LOGS Alt D SYSTEM PROBLEM REPORTING See 7 6 2 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs on page 7 11 PRINT SCREEN Make a SCREENSHOT See 7 6 2 Collect a Trouble Image with Logs on page 7 11 Alt E EJECT DEVICE i e CD or DVD MEDIA Alt Q QUALITY TEST SCREEN Alt S DICOM JOB SPOOLER Ctrl PrintScreen SCREEN CAPTURE See Section 7 7 Screen Capture...

Page 315: ...ith the new probe reload software Do not reload presets until you have tested the system with the default settings and be sure that the problem does not persist User Defined Presets can carry corruption back to the system If you suspect that the problem may be caused by software corruption please note Corrupt Presets can be identified by a problem in only one exam category using a specific probe o...

Page 316: ...about the occurrence of the problem and the date and time it showed up Reload the software 7 4 3 2 CD DVD Drive Failures Check that the media disk capacity and speed is supported For the CD the capacity is normally 700MB If the CD drive is having problems replace the CD Drive If the problem persists replace the BEP 7 4 3 3 Image CD DVD not read Put the CD or DVD in a laptop and see if it can be re...

Page 317: ...P Assembly might be defective too 7 4 4 2 No Video on LCD Display If the video is too dim has dimmed areas or there is no video at all replace the HV LCD inverter Check the cabling within the system If the HV LCD inverter is burnt there is a possibility that the Digital Video Card on the PC also got damaged in that case you can replace the Video Card Replace the Video Adapter inside the BEP Replac...

Page 318: ...twork Connectivity Troubleshooting 7 5 1 First Status Select the network icon on the bottom of the screen to get a first status for the network connectivity If the status reports No network verify cabling 7 5 2 Cannot connect to anything via the network Check with your laptop if you can ping the VIVID E9 and the device Printer or PACs ...

Page 319: ...need to reboot the VIVID E9 Check device configuration Clean the spooler F4 Check Connectivity configuration on the VIVID E9 If it is a printer check that the printer supports the film type and format Some printers don t support different image sizes or different formats such as the Patient entry screen If this is the case the spooler may show the job in a Done status but the images never get prin...

Page 320: ...ystem Information The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer Product Name VIVID E9 Select Config F2 About screen Applications Software Application Software Version Application Software CD Part Number System Software System Software Revision System Software CD Part Number ...

Page 321: ...tted CD R DVD R or save to the Export directory D drive for remote viewing through InSite NOTE You MUST select one of the available devices as the destination device if it is to be different than the default Export directory on the hard drive The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression 7 6 2 1 Advanced log options Extensive Log enables the creation...

Page 322: ... then be viewed by the OLC 7 7 3 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut 1 With the desired image displayed on the screen press Ctrl and PrtSc print screen keys simultaneously 2 From the touch panel select Utility Service Utilities Common Utilities Image Compress Delete Utilities 3 Select the check box for the image s you want to save in the D export directory 4 Select Compress Files A compre...

Page 323: ...the VIVID E9 See 4 2 1 Power ON Boot Up on page 4 4 for detailed instructions After scanner initialization is complete continue with the steps below 2 Press CONFIG on the Utility tab on the Touch Panel 3 Log on as ADM A password for the user ADM may be required See 4 2 5 Logging on to VIVID E9 as ADM on page 4 15 for detailed instructions 4 Select System from the bottom of the menu that appears on...

Page 324: ...n If in a quiet environment it should be possible to hear the Lock Engine engage for a few seconds 8 Check if the Lock function works now If the lock still does not work try to press the TestXY button and wait for this dialog to appear 9 Continue with step 2 in 7 9 3 XY Lock is not working on page 7 17 Figure 7 3 Motor Controller Test dialog Figure 7 4 TestXY results ...

Page 325: ...e situation This will if the situation is trapped bring up a dialog telling that the system is not responding 1 Press Restart to restart the application This will save a special debug log When the system restarts it will show a dialog where it requests you to save the log 2 Enter a descriptive text then press Save 3 To export the log press ALT D This will bring up the same dialog again 4 Now selec...

Page 326: ...E MANUAL 7 16 Section 7 9 Troubleshooting 7 9 2 Unable to scan Figure 7 5 Unable to scan Unable to scan Check the probe connection YES NO Are probes connected in right way Restart the scanner Are other operations possible YES Check the Main Power Supply NO END ...

Page 327: ...ing NOTE Cables are not labeled at the XY controller so right side and left side motors are not defined When troubleshooting the XY brake motors keep this in mind The rear motors are 1 and 3 The front motors are 2 and 4 Motor 1 and 2 are on the same side Motor 3 and 4 are on the same side opposite to motor 1 and 2 If you are in a silent environment it may be possible to hear which motor is activat...

Page 328: ... release lock mechanism is located to the rightmost section of the drawer thus the force needed to release and lock the alphanumeric keyboard will increase significantly if the leftmost section of the keyboard is used Press the rightmost section of the alphanumeric keyboard to release lock it Figure 7 6 Best area to press to release or lock the alphanumeric keyboard ...

Page 329: ...on screen Try a replacement USB Footswitch 7 9 8 USB Device s stopped working If a keyboard and mouse or other equipment not intended for connection to the VIVID E9 has been connected to any of the USB connectors on the front of the VIVID E9 all the USB devices may stop working due to an overload condition The workaround is to use one of the USB ports on the External I O 7 9 8 1 TEE Probe Temperat...

Page 330: ...ystem If the air filters become too dusty a higher fan speed is required to keep the air stream at the needed level When the fan speed increase the fan noise will also increase If the cooling air stream is insufficient to stabilize the interior temperature within the operating margin the system will stop operating Solution Clean or replace the filters If a fan is worn out it may be noisy or stop w...

Page 331: ...he VIVID E9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect Some of these sources include medical lasers scanners cauterizing guns computers mo...

Page 332: ... from other EMI sources Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency high powered radio or video broadcast signals Ground the unit Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet Install all screws RF gaskets covers cores After you finish repairing or updating the system repla...

Page 333: ...canner to another location and verify if the noise changes or disappear This may help you to locate an external noise source Try to move the scanner to another location inside the room another room another floor 7 10 2 4 Disconnect External Cables 1 Disconnect all external cables network all unused probes ECG leads and verify if the noise disappears ...

Page 334: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 7 24 Section 7 10 Noise troubleshooting This page left blank to facilitate double sided printing ...

Page 335: ...ts in this chapter 8 1 Overview 8 1 8 2 Warnings and important information 8 2 8 3 Definitions of Left Right Front and Back 8 5 8 4 Reloading the software 8 6 8 5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers 8 38 8 6 Top Console Parts Replacement 8 73 8 7 Replacing XYZ Parts 8 174 8 8 Main Console parts replacement 8 190 8 9 Casters and Brakes replacement 8 208 8 10 Front End Processor FEP Card Cage parts replace...

Page 336: ...s still plugged into the AC Outlet WARNING WARNING BECAUSE OF THE LIMITED ACCESS TO CABINETS AND EQUIPMENT IN THE FIELD PLACING PEOPLE IN AWKWARD POSITIONS WE HAVE LIMITED THE LIFTING WEIGHT FOR ONE PERSON IN THE FIELD TO 16 KG 35 LBS ANYTHING OVER 16 KG 35 LBS REQUIRES TWO PEOPLE WARNING WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS WHEELS OR ADJUSTING BRAKES WARNING WARNING DO N...

Page 337: ... with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site for example body coils or an ultrasound probe The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry as well as the people who will receive or open this package NOTE The US Department of Transportation DOT has ruled that items that were saturated and or dripping with human blood that are now caked wit...

Page 338: ...5 M3 3 BIT TX 20 M4 4 BIT TX 25 M5 5 BIT TX 30 M6 6 BIT TX 45 M10 7 FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 3 2 mm 8 FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 4 mm 9 FLAT BLADE SCREWDRIVER 6 mm 10 PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH1 11 PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH2 12 PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER PH3 13 HEX KEY 5 mm UNBRAKO KEY ALLEN KEY 14 HEX KEY 8 mm UNBRAKO KEY ALLEN KEY 15 HEX KEY 10 mm UNBRAKO KEY ALLEN KEY 16 HEX KEY M12 REAR CASTERS 130 Nm UNBRAKO ...

Page 339: ...pter 8 Replacement procedures 8 5 Section 8 3 Definitions of Left Right Front and Back The Figure below illustrates what is Left Right Front and Rear or Back of the VIVID E9 Figure 8 1 Definition of Left Right Front and Back of VIVID E9 RIGHT SIDE REAR BACK LEFT SIDE FRONT ...

Page 340: ...ECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 6 Section 8 4 Reloading the software Section 8 4 Reloading the software 8 4 1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to reinstall the software on VIVID E9 ...

Page 341: ...v112 1 x v112 1 x v112 1 x GA200890 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA000950 Vivid E9 100 230V 4D Expert Option 19 LCD GB200001 BEP6 w 4D v104 3 4 or higher v112 0 7 or higher v112 1 x GB200003 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia Quadro 2000D v104 3 3 or higher v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA200890 BEP w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GB000040 Vivid E9 100 230V BT12 Pro Configura...

Page 342: ... or GA200800 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000830 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 17 LCD GA200804 VE9 Card Rack Complete w MLA4 GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000835 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 19 LCD GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 ...

Page 343: ...Patient Archive and User Defined Settings Password for the user ADM The default password for the user ADM is ulsadm If the password has been changed by the site you should record it for your own use before you start the work on the VIVID E9 8 4 4 Tools provided with the VIVID E9 at delivery or after an upgrade VIVID E9 System software DVD Application software CD If present Patch for VIVID E9 CD Pr...

Page 344: ... of the Patient Database Depending on the location set up either move the images to a remote server or to removable media like DVD or CD discs As the images are moved the database will point to the new location If the backup procedure is not completed correctly the images and database information will be lost NOTICE An error or a power loss may occur Always backup the Patient Archive and the Syste...

Page 345: ...The printer s IP Number The printer s IP number is not easily available via the VIVID E9 s menus Print out a status sheet on the printer For more information please refer to the printer s documentation If the printer is assigned to a key record the key NOTICE An error or a power loss may occur during the software loading It is considered to be a best practice to always keep a record on paper of th...

Page 346: ...led on the VIVID E9 has become corrupted VIVID E9 s configuration setup has issues that are difficult to troubleshoot and resolve so it may be easier to do a software reload and start the setup from scratch 8 4 9 Reloading the Software from Repository on page 8 13 The same as above but it is impossible to access OLC 8 4 10 Loading the Software from DVD CD on page 8 16 When asked select B You want ...

Page 347: ... compressed original files from the DVD and CD were stored on a separate disk partition on the hard disk drive labeled REPOSIT Repository If you are going to reinstall the software you can install from these files Usually when reinstalling the software on the same HDD you don t need to copy the files from DVD CD once more 8 4 9 2 Preparations Disconnect all external USB devices before starting the...

Page 348: ...nline Center OLC Tell OLC that you need a Challenge Code and on request you must read the Challenge String on the screen OLC will return a password that you need to type in as the Response 5 Enter the Response Code password you got from OLC Figure 8 2 GRUB menu Figure 8 3 GE Healthcare Recovery Console Example GNU GRUB version 0 97 638K lower 2095879K upper memory _________________________________...

Page 349: ... 6 Press the Enter key on the keyboard The software reload starts NOTE Time to complete the software reload is typically 15 to 25 minutes When the System Software reload is done the VIVID E9 reboots After the reboot the VIVID E9 starts to load the Application Software This is done without any interactions The TCP IP settings Computer Name etc are restored The VIVID E9 shuts down Figure 8 4 Reload ...

Page 350: ...e CD with Printer Driver software When installing the software start with the System Software then continue with the Application Software and if included install the patch software after you loaded the Application Software The Printer Driver software must be loaded later after the network connection has been verified or set up 8 4 10 2 Preparations for software loading 1 If not already done perfor...

Page 351: ...ed Next the BEP starts to boot from the disc in the DVD drive Several screens will be displayed indicating the progress 5 If asked for press F and the booting continues Figure 8 5 BIOS Boot Screen BEP6 Figure 8 6 First four screens starting PC DOS and loading drivers for the DVD drive Starting PC DOS Starting PC DOS This driver is provided by Oak Technology Inc OTI 91X ATAPI CD ROM device driver R...

Page 352: ...rased If backup has not been performed all data like Patient Database System Configuration and User Configurations Customer Presets will be lost Table 8 4 Descriptions of your choices WHEN TO USE DESCRIPTION COMMAND Use this procedure if The BEP or the HDD has been exchanged You want to erase all data on the HDD The installation on C failed To do a complete VIVID E9 software installation All data ...

Page 353: ...N Figure 8 8 Are you really sure Delete HDD Content This will erase the whole harddisk before installation Are you really sure y n This will erase the whole harddisk before installation Are you really sure y n Y Installing All This will erase the whole harddisk before installation Are you really sure y n Y Installing All Partition Status Type Volume Label Mbytes System Usage C 1 DELETED YOU HAVE T...

Page 354: ...press a key to initiate the reboot NOTE Let the DVD remain in the DVD tray 3 Press any key to continue The VIVID E9 will reboot The monitor may display the message No sync for a few seconds before the BIOS Boot Screen is displayed see next page Figure 8 9 Installing Empty P scheme onto the HDD INSTALLING AN EMPTY P SCHEME A RESTART IS REQUIRED The system needs to be rebooted in order to continue t...

Page 355: ...MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 21 8 4 10 5 Press A Install System Software Erase all partititions cont d The VIVID E9 loads the BIOS The BEP starts to boot into PC DOS Refer to Figure 8 6 on page 8 17 for illustrations Figure 8 10 BIOS Boot Screen BEP6 ...

Page 356: ...the copied Image file is used as source when the System software is installed on the C partition Several screens will be displayed When the installation of the System Software has finished the DVD is ejected and you are requested to remove the System Software DVD and insert the Application Software CD 4 Continue with Loading the Application Software on page 8 23 Figure 8 11 Move contents from DVD ...

Page 357: ...cont d Loading the Application Software 1 If not already done remove the System Software DVD and insert the applicable Application Software CD in the DVD drive 2 Press any key to continue The VIVID E9 will reboot The monitor may display the message No sync for a few seconds before the BIOS Boot Screen is displayed Figure 8 13 Rebooting Figure 8 14 BIOS Boot Screen BEP6 ...

Page 358: ...10 5 Press A Install System Software Erase all partititions cont d When the screen below is displayed just wait and the installation continues Several screens are displayed as illustrated below The VIVID E9 will then reboot once more before it can continue Figure 8 15 Ready to boot Figure 8 16 Booting 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 359: ... 5 Press A Install System Software Erase all partititions cont d The monitor may display the message No sync for a few seconds before the BIOS Boot Screen is displayed When the screen below is displayed just wait and the installation continues Figure 8 17 BIOS Boot Screen BEP6 Figure 8 18 Ready to boot once more ...

Page 360: ...tem Software Erase all partititions cont d The booting continues When booted the Start Application dialog will display on the screen 3 Select Install SW to continue the installation 4 Select OK 5 Select OK once more Figure 8 19 Loading Figure 8 20 Start Application dialog Figure 8 21 StartLoader dialog 1 Figure 8 22 StartLoader dialog 2 ...

Page 361: ... Replacement procedures 8 27 8 4 10 5 Press A Install System Software Erase all partititions cont d The LoadSoftware bat file starts to run Figure 8 23 Starting the LoadSoftware bat file 1 2 3 Text in screenshot Starting installation from media 4 Figure 8 24 Click OK to continue ...

Page 362: ...the computer name has been generated previously the pop up screen in Figure 8 27 will be displayed 6 Enter the VIVID E9 s Serial Number The Serial Number is located on a label at the rear of the VIVID E9 NOTE You don t need to include the leading zeroes in the Serial Number They will be automatically added Example 4404 Zeros will be added so the result will be 004404 The Serial Number is used when...

Page 363: ... and New Computer Name is correct or select Change if you want to change the Serial Number When confirmed the software installation starts Figure 8 27 Confirm the Serial Number CAUTION Computer Name must match original computer name If changed access to archived images from this system will be lost Figure 8 28 The next screens 1 Copying files 2 3 Extracting package 4 Unpacking SW 5 Installing new ...

Page 364: ...tion is complete you are prompted to restart the VIVID E9 but remove the CD first 8 Remove the CD 9 Select OK to restart When you have selected OK to restart the CD DVD drawer will close and the VIVID E9 will restart Several screens will display during this first boot from the installed software Figure 8 29 Installation complete Press OK to restart Figure 8 30 Screens during first boot 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 365: ...king for the Option Key is displayed 10 Type the Option Key and select OK to continue The VIVID E9 continue to boot 11 Next If any Software Patches or Virus Hardening software CDs are available continue with 8 4 10 7 Loading Software Patches on page 8 37 Else start setup as described in Section 3 8 Configuration on page 3 27 Figure 8 31 The Application software starts Figure 8 32 SW Licence dialog...

Page 366: ...o update the software on C Next a screen with the following text is displayed This will repair upgrade partition C Are you really sure y n 2 Select y The System Software image file is being copied from the DVD to the repository Due to the file size this may take from 8 to 10 minutes Figure 8 33 Copying System Software image file from DVD to Repository Next the installation of the System Software s...

Page 367: ...stallation Installing the Application Software Follow these steps to install the Application Software 1 Remove the System Software DVD 2 Insert the Application Software CD 3 Press a key on the keyboard to reboot After several minutes and after an additional automatic reboot a dialog box is displayed on the screen Figure 8 36 Select Install SW 4 Select Install SW Next the Start Loader screen is dis...

Page 368: ...e software installation Figure 8 38 Select OK to start the software installation 6 Select OK to start the software installation Next the Application SW Installation warning is displayed on the screen Figure 8 39 Select OK 7 At the prompt select OK to confirm that you will continue the installation WARNING WARNING DO NOT INTERRUPT THE INSTALLATION PROCESS INTERRUPTION WILL RESULT IN A NON FUNCTIONA...

Page 369: ...ure 8 40 Confirm the Serial Number 8 Select OK to confirm that the Serial Number is correct or select Change if you want to change the Serial Number When confirmed the unpacking of the software starts Figure 8 41 Unpacking the software When the software has been unpacked the installation of the Application software starts CAUTION Computer Name must match original computer name If changed access to...

Page 370: ... installed the InSite ExC software is installed Figure 8 43 Installing the InSite ExC software After the InSite ExC software has been installed the installation is complete and you are prompted to restart the Vivid E9 9 Remove the CD from the DVD CD drive 10 Select OK to restart When you have selected OK to restart the CD DVD drawer will close and the Vivid E9 will restart Figure 8 44 Installation...

Page 371: ...1 Based on your recordings correct the settings as needed 4 Continue with Section 3 11 Options Setup on page 3 49 Based on your recordings correct the settings as needed 5 After a software load you should always calibrate the Front End as described in Section 6 6 DC Offset Calibration Front End Alignment on page 6 11 6 Install the network printer if any Please refer to the Printer Driver Installat...

Page 372: ...ar holes give access to the locks By inserting a 1 Phillips screwdriver 10 16 cm 4 6 inch length or similar size and length tool into the holes and bending the handle on the screwdriver down to the floor one lock at a time you can release the locks You may need to pull the cover outwards at the same time to release the lock mechanism WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WH...

Page 373: ...l it reaches the lock mechanism 2 Push the handle on the screwdriver downwards to release the lock 3 Repeat the steps above for the other lock 4 Lift the cover forward and up to remove it from the VIVID E9 5 Set it away on a safe place until you need it again 6 Repeat the steps above to remove the other Side Cover Figure 8 45 Release locks and remove Side Cover Figure 8 46 Side Cover removed 2 REL...

Page 374: ...hooks onto the Top Cover 3 Align and squeeze the front edge of the side cover to latch it into place 4 Position the Side Cover s side lock first 5 Position the Side Cover s front lock 6 Align and squeeze the bottom front of the side cover to latch it into place 7 Position the Side Cover s rear lock lifting up the rear tab and guiding it into place 8 Align and squeeze the bottom rear of the side co...

Page 375: ...NERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OF...

Page 376: ... E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 42 Section 8 5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers 8 5 3 2 Top Cover removal procedure Follow these steps to remove the Top Cover 1 Remove two screws 2 Remove the Top Cover Figure 8 48 Top Cover fixing screws seen from above REAR HANDLE ...

Page 377: ...er installation procedure Follow these steps to install the Top Cover 1 Position the Top Cover onto the Front Cover at the four hooks 2 Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover 3 Install and tighten the two screws Figure 8 49 Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover seen from front Figure 8 50 Hook Top Cover onto Front Cover seen from side ...

Page 378: ... Side Cover 2 Remove the Side Bumper from the Side Cover 8 5 4 4 Side Bumpers installation Follow these steps to install the Side Bumper 1 Align the fastening holes in the Side Bumper with the holes in the Side Cover 2 Fasten the screws with washer one by one until all have been inserted 3 Tighten the screws 4 Install the Side Cover WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHE...

Page 379: ...low Figure 8 51 the Side Cover was removed to be able to view the Side Latch You don t need to remove the Side Cover to perform this procedure 8 5 5 3 Foot Rest Bumper installation Follow these steps to install the Foot Rest Bumper 1 Position the Foot Rest Bumper in place WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOL...

Page 380: ...IVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 46 Section 8 5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers 2 Push the Foot Rest Bumper down and over the pedals You may need to push down the pedals to be able to place the Foot Rest Bumper 3 Replace the Side Covers if they were removed ...

Page 381: ... Assembly to the chassis 2 Pull the upper end of the Front Cover out and upwards to free it from the pedals and the frame WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAI...

Page 382: ...ont Cover 1 Thread the Front Cover so it fits in between chassis and pedals 2 Align the Front Cover guide pins with holes in the frame 3 Fasten Front Cover with two 2 pc screws and washers NOTE Orientate the washers as illustrated in the detail in the figure below 4 Install the Foot Rest Bumper 5 Install the Top Cover 6 Install the Side Covers Figure 8 53 Fixing screws with washers ...

Page 383: ...Guide is attached with hatches 1 Use a flat bladed screwdriver to loosen the hatches 2 Remove the Plate Connectors w Guide WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WA...

Page 384: ...D E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 50 Section 8 5 Replacing Covers and Bumpers 8 5 7 3 Plate Connectors w Guide installation 1 Position the plate and snap it into position 2 Install Front Cover 3 Install Foot Rest Bumper 4 Install Top Cover 5 Install Side Covers ...

Page 385: ... Follow these steps to install the Filter Cover 1 Inspect the Filter and clean if necessary 2 Place the Filter Cover into position and press the Filter Cover top corners until the Filter Cover locks engage CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAI...

Page 386: ...move two screws on each side of the Rear Cover 2 Lift the Rear Cover away WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISC...

Page 387: ...ure the Z mechanism s manual release handle extends through the air vent on the Rear Cover 3 Position the Rear Cover into place 4 Gently pull up on the Z mechanism s manual release handle to confirm proper position through the Rear Cover air vents 5 Install the four screws two on each side Install the two lower screws first then the upper screws 6 Inspect the Filter and clean if necessary 7 Instal...

Page 388: ...e the lock 3 Open the Door I O Panel 4 Hold the Door I O Panel near the upper hinge and pop hinge out and away from the upper hinge post on the Rear Cover WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAI...

Page 389: ... cont d 8 5 10 3 Install the I O Door Follow these steps to install the Door I O Panel 1 Place the Door I O Panel into position by sliding lower hinge onto lower hinge post 2 Pop the upper hinge into place onto the upper hinge post Figure 8 57 Hinge placement on Door I O Panel UPPER HINGE UPPER HINGE POST LOWER HINGE POST LOWER HINGE ...

Page 390: ...s replacement 8 5 11 1 Preparations When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Remove the Side Covers 4 Remove the Rear Bumper 5 Remove Filter Cover at rear 6 Remove Filter 7 Remove the Top Cover 8 Remove the Rear Cover ...

Page 391: ...Hook removal Follow these steps to remove the Cable Hook 1 Locate the Cable Hook s 2 Place the Rear Cover face down on a protected flat surface 3 Remove the screw securing the Cable Hook 4 Repeat step 2 to remove the other Cable Hook if necessary Figure 8 58 Door I O Panel Figure 8 59 Cable Hook screw placement Cable Hook ...

Page 392: ... Cable Hook 1 Position the Cable Hook on the Rear Cover 2 Install the screw to secure the Cable Hook to the Rear Cover 3 Repeat step 2 to replace the other Cable Hook if necessary 4 Install the Rear Cover 5 Install the Top Cover 6 Inspect the Filter and clean if necessary 7 Install the Filter 8 Install the Filter Cover at rear 9 Install the Rear Bumper 10 Install the Side Covers ...

Page 393: ...e Follow these steps to install the Rear Bumper 1 Place the Rear Bumper into position 2 Install the 2 screws to secure the Rear Bumper WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POW...

Page 394: ...he Rear Handle 1 Install the Rear handle in position so its fastening holes are flush with the holes in the frame WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT...

Page 395: ...EN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POW...

Page 396: ...over WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT...

Page 397: ...he DVD drive 3 Raise the console to full height 4 Remove the remaining screw on the right side that secures the Column Cover Assembly 5 Remove the 2 screws on the left side that secure the Column Cover Assembly 6 Remove Column Cover Assembly NOTE The Main Cable Cover will also be released Figure 8 62 With console lowered lower right side screw placement Figure 8 63 With console raised upper right ...

Page 398: ...ese steps to install the Column Cover Assembly 1 Install the Main Cable Cover so the Column Cover Assembly overlaps Main Cable Cover edges 2 Install screws to Column Cover Assembly tighten by hand 3 Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover 4 Install the Top Cover 5 Install the Side Covers Figure 8 65 Position the column cover inside the front cover ...

Page 399: ... The Main Cable Cover is held by four screws Follow these steps to remove the Main Cable Cover 1 Remove the Main Cable Cover WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 ...

Page 400: ...ps Main Cable Cover edges see Figure 8 66 2 With the console raised to its full height install the 3 screws to secure the Main Cable Cover and Column Cover Assembly 3 Lower the console and install the lower right side screw See Figure 8 62 With console lowered lower right side screw placement on page 8 63 4 Position the lower Column Cover tab inside the Front Cover 5 Install the Top Cover 6 Instal...

Page 401: ... release point and pressing until release Pull the console out to its extended position to gain access to the screws in the next step WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWE...

Page 402: ...two types of covers one type has two screws 1 and the other type has one screw 2 3 Remove the screws from the cover s to replace 4 Pull down and slide the cover away from the XY mechanism Be sure to flex the plastic slightly so the plastic clears the XY 5 Disconnect the cable Figure 8 69 XY Frogleg mechanism covers right side frog leg from underneath Figure 8 70 Pull down and slide XY cover out PL...

Page 403: ...r XY Frogleg motors installation procedure Follow these steps to install the Covers under XY Frogleg motors 1 Thread the cover s on the cable 2 Perform a dry fit of the covers confirm the covers face the correct way before connecting the cable and ground 3 Install the screw securing the ground 4 Connect the cable 5 Slide cover s into place 6 Replace the screws to the covers Figure 8 71 Pull down a...

Page 404: ...t and pressing until release Pull the console out to its extended position to gain access to the screws in the next step WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT...

Page 405: ...remove the Bulkhead Cover 1 Use thumbs to press upper lock tabs toward the front of the VIVID E9 to release the top of the Bulkhead Cover or if needed use a 4 mm flat blade screwdriver to release the 2 lock tabs 2 Pull the Bulkhead Cover away from the VIVID E9 Figure 8 73 Bulkhead Cover location Figure 8 74 Upper tab lock placement on Bulkhead Cover BULKHEAD COVER WITH XY MECHANISM EXTENDED ...

Page 406: ...w these steps to install the Bulkhead Covers 1 Place the Bulkhead Cover s mounting angle onto the lower edge of the bulkhead opening NOTE Tuck any cables within the cover to avoid pinching the cables 2 Push the two upper tab locks into the openings in the Frame UI Carrier Figure 8 75 Bulkhead Cover removed Figure 8 76 Install Bulkhead Cover BULKHEAD COVER LOWER TAB LOCKS MOUNTING ANGLE Tab locks ...

Page 407: ...cables to the monitor To get access to the cable connectors remove the LCD Rear Cover Follow these steps to remove the LCD Rear Cover 1 For easy access tilt the LCD Monitor forward to horizontal position WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TUR...

Page 408: ... GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 74 Section 8 6 Top Console Parts Replacement 2 Unscrew the two fixing screws on the rear side of the LCD Monitor assembly 3 Remove the LCD Rear Cover and place it on a safe place ...

Page 409: ...ON 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 75 8 6 2 3 Disconnect the 17 LCD Monitor Cables 1 Disconnect the two cables 2 Tilt the monitor back to vertical position Figure 8 78 Disconnect cables POWER USB CABLE HDMI CABLE ...

Page 410: ... LCD Monitor assembly Two screws are used for fixing the LCD Monitor assembly to the LCD Arm Bracket 1 Loosen and remove the screws 2 Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards until you can lift it away from the LCD Arm Bracket 3 Place the LCD Monitor on a clean and safe place Figure 8 79 Fixing screws Figure 8 80 LCD Bracket FIXING SCREWS ...

Page 411: ...Place the LCD assembly onto the LCD Arm Bracket Be sure that the notches in the LCD fixing bracket is well aligned onto the corresponding positions on the LCD Arm Bracket 2 Install the two screws M5x8 Torque 5 7 Nm 3 Tilt the monitor to horizontal position Figure 8 81 Install the LCD Monitor Figure 8 82 Two fixing screws NOTCHES ONE ON EACH SIDE OF THE BRACKET ONE SHOWN HERE FIXING SCREWS ...

Page 412: ...l the 17 LCD Monitor cont d 4 Connect the two cables Arrange the cables as illustrated in Figure 8 83 Connect cables 5 Install the LCD Rear Cover and fasten it with the fixing screws Figure 8 83 Connect cables Figure 8 84 LCD Monitor Rear View POWER USB CABLE HDMI CABLE USE HDMI DVI ADAPTER IF NEEDED LCD REAR COVER FIXING SCREWS ...

Page 413: ...Monitor assembly covers the two cables to the monitor To get access to the cable connectors remove the Cable Cover Follow these steps to remove the Cable Cover 1 For easy access tilt the LCD Monitor forward to horizontal position WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OU...

Page 414: ...ar side of the LCD Monitor assembly 3 Remove the Monitor Cables Cover Carefully insert a screwdriver into the Removal Slot to separate the cover from the LCD Monitor assembly 4 Lift the cover away and place it on a safe place Figure 8 85 LCD Monitor assembly rear view MONITOR CABLES COVER FIXING SCREW LCD MONITOR ASSEMBLY TILTED FORWARDS REMOVAL SLOT ...

Page 415: ... the 19 LCD Monitor Cables 1 Disconnect the two signal cables 2 Remove the 2 cable clips if present NOTE If you are replacing any cables you will also need to remove 2 additional cable clips at the bracket Figure 8 86 Disconnect cable clips and cables ADDITIONAL CABLE CLIPS REMOVE ONLY IF REPLACING CABLES CABLES CABLE CLIPS ...

Page 416: ...D Monitor assembly to the Monitor Bracket 1 Loosen the four screws by turning each screw between one half and one turn counter clockwise You don t need to remove the screws 2 Lift the LCD Monitor assembly upwards until you can lift it away from the Monitor Bracket 3 Place the LCD Monitor on a clean and safe surface Figure 8 87 Four fixing screws Figure 8 88 Monitor Bracket FOUR FIXING SCREWS ...

Page 417: ...r 1 Install the LCD Monitor assembly on the Monitor Bracket Verify that all four fixing screws have engaged in their slots 2 Tighten the four screws 3 Tilt the monitor to horizontal position 4 Connect the cables 5 Connect the cable clips if present Figure 8 89 Four fixing screws Figure 8 90 Connect cables FOUR FIXING SCREWS ADDITIONAL CABLE CLIPS INSTALL IF REPLACING CABLES CABLES CABLE CLIPS ...

Page 418: ...VID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 84 Section 8 6 Top Console Parts Replacement 8 6 3 8 Install the Monitor Cables Cover 1 Install the Monitor Cables Cover and fasten it with the fixing screw Figure 8 91 LCD Monitor rear view MONITOR CABLES COVER FIXING SCREW ...

Page 419: ...cover WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGH...

Page 420: ...onnector Lock upwards then disconnect the HDMI plug 8 6 4 3 Remove the LCD Arm assembly Follow these steps to remove the LCD Arm assembly 1 Slide the LCD Mount Lock Handle into unlocked position 2 Move the LCD Arm from side to side when at the same time pulling upwards until you can lift LCD Arm assembly away Figure 8 92 LCD Cables at Bulkhead Figure 8 93 LCD Mount Lock Handle POWER USB PLUG HDMI ...

Page 421: ...the LCD Arm Assembly 1 Carefully install the LCD Arm assembly into position first feeding the LCD Arm cables down through the console opening 2 Push the LCD Mount Lock Handle into locked position Figure 8 94 LCD Arm installed onto the UI Frame Upper Arm for 17 screen illustrated Figure 8 95 LCD Mount Lock Handle DO NOT ADJUST THIS NUT LOCKED POSITION LCD MOUNT LOCK HANDLE ...

Page 422: ...onnect the LCD cables to the connectors on the Bulkhead 4 Install the Bulkhead Cover 5 Install the LCD monitor 8 6 4 5 Calibration and adjustments See Section 6 4 Backlight adjustment on page 6 5 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions Figure 8 96 Bulkhead board connections POWER USB PLUG HDMI PLUG SCREW BRACKET LOCK HDMI introduced after the picture was taken ...

Page 423: ...NG WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP...

Page 424: ...e LCD Cables NOTE When handling the arm use the arm lock unless the arm is being turned Locking will help stabilize the arm NOTE LCD cable color may be different than pictured 1 Remove the two M4 x 8 screws holding the Bumper Cover to the Arm Figure 8 97 Three Arm Sections Figure 8 98 Screws for Bumper cover First Arm Section Second Arm Section Third Arm Section Bumper Cover ...

Page 425: ...Remove the bumper cover from the end of the first arm as shown in Figure 8 99 3 Remove the covers from all three arm sections of the arm assembly a Remove the M4 x 8 screw holding the first arm section cover b Remove the M4 x 8 screw holding the third arm section cover Figure 8 99 Bumper Cover Removed Figure 8 100 Third Arm Section Cover Removal ...

Page 426: ...the second arm section cover with Phillips screwdriver 4 Cut tie wraps securing cables in arm 5 Remove the cable s to be replaced 6 Mark cables After removing the cable s to be replaced according to this section stretch out both the existing and replacement cable side by side and transfer any markings from existing cable to replacement cable Figure 8 101 Second Arm Section Cover Removal ...

Page 427: ...starting at the console end of the first arm section thread the replacement cable s through the arm sections toward the monitor end 2 Feed cable through opening opposite the arm lock mechanism side of first arm section 3 Make sure the cable markings line up with the midpoint placement location for the first arm Figure 8 103 Figure 8 102 Feed Cable through First Arm Figure 8 103 First left and Seco...

Page 428: ...ing covers on arms test arm motion and cable stress 10 Secure the cables in the locations indicated in Figure 8 103 Band the tie wrap through the clamp 11 Replace the second arm cover 12 Replace the third arm cover 13 Replace the first arm cover 14 Replace the bumper cover NOTE Rotate arm adapter assembly on arm to ensure movement is smooth and free from binding through full 180 15 Reinstall the L...

Page 429: ...IRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 95 8 6 5 4 Calibration and adjustments See Section 6 4 Backlight adjustment on page 6 5 for LCD Monitor calibration instructions ...

Page 430: ...ARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PAN...

Page 431: ...essary to remove the LCD Monitor or the LCD Arm 1 Remove the 2 screws securing the LCD Mount Lock 2 Remove the LCD Mount Lock 8 6 6 3 LCD Mount Lock installation procedure Follow these steps to install the LCD Mount Lock 1 Position the LCD Mount Lock 2 Install the 2 screws securing the LCD Mount Lock 3 Install the Bulkhead Cover Figure 8 106 Screw placement LCD Mount Lock LCD MOUNT LOCK HANDLE DO ...

Page 432: ...ONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDU...

Page 433: ...e rear of the VIVID E9 release the console s XY mechanism by inserting a screwdriver into the release point and pressing until release Pull the console out to its extended position to gain access to the screws in the next step 2 Remove four screws with washers from the Operator Panel s back cover Figure 8 108 Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly Figure 8 109 XY Frogleg mechanism release Figure 8 11...

Page 434: ...t the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel assembly slightly from the bottom and then tilt the top toward the front of the VIVID E9 There are tabs at the bottom of the Touch Panel Assembly Pull straight up on these tabs NOTE For better access swing the LCD Monitor to the side NOTICE Failure to remove the five OP Panel Knobs first could cause damage to the knob shafts Figure 8 111 Remove Upper OP Panel Touch...

Page 435: ...ace 8 6 7 3 Install the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly Follow these steps to install the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly 1 Place the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly in the frame 2 Ensure that all Ground cables are connected as shown in Figure 8 113 OP Grounding on page 8 101 Figure 8 112 Upper OP Panel Touch Panel assembly cable placement Figure 8 113 OP Grounding USB VIDEO from BEP L...

Page 436: ...tion J21 USB Cable 2 part of Main Cable in position J22 Bulkhead Board USB Cable 1 from bulkhead position closest to the OP in position J24 Bulkhead Board USB Cable 2 from bulkhead position most far from the OP in position J25 NOTICE Do not apply stretch on the Ribbon Cable It stretched the connector on Operator Panel Lower may break resulting in a malfunction Figure 8 114 Cables on rear of Operat...

Page 437: ...Touch Panel Assembly by securing the 5 tabs and 2 hooks 5 Install the four screws to the Back Cover from behind 6 Install the five OP Panel Knobs Figure 8 115 Cables to Upper OP NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables when installing the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel Assembly Figure 8 116 Slots for alignment tabs USB VIDEO FROM BEP USB UPPER OP PANEL FROM BEP POWER ON OFF FROM BEP SLOT SLOTS...

Page 438: ...AP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG ...

Page 439: ... On some VIVID E9s the openings for the USB connectors have EMC fingers attached on the right and left sides of each opening ref Figure 8 119 Be careful to not loose these EMC fingers when you remove the LCD Cover On newer VIVID E9s the construction has been changed so this issue has been resolved 3 Lift pull the upper part of the LCD Cover so you can release it from the four protuding tabs Figure...

Page 440: ...he USB Connector Board to the LCD plastic Cover 7 Carefully separate the Frame w LCD and Touch Screen from the LCD plastic Cover 8 Carefully separate the Frame w LCD and Touch Screen and the Upper Bezel 9 Transfer the existing Main Controller Board to the new Frame w LCD 10 Transfer the High Voltage Backlight Inverter to the new Frame w LCD Figure 8 120 Operator Panel Upper without LCD Cover seen ...

Page 441: ... Upper Bezel 3 Install the fixing screws NOTE Be careful so you don t bend the EMC fingers see Figure 8 122 when installing the LCD Cover 4 Install the LCD Cover 5 Install the five 5x fixing screws 6 Install the Operator Panel Upper 7 Install the Control Knobs 8 6 8 4 Calibration and adjustments Run the Touch Screen Calibration in section Section 6 5 Touch Screen Calibration on page 6 10 Figure 8 ...

Page 442: ...TION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONT...

Page 443: ...ALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 109 8 6 9 1 Preparations cont d 4 Remove five OP Panel Knobs see Figure 8 124 Figure 8 124 Remove five knobs ...

Page 444: ...ck cover by removing the three 3x fixing screws Phillips 1 and the two screws at the D SUB connector 3 16 inch nut driver see Figure 8 125 Operator Panel Upper seen from the rear side on page 8 110 3 Lift pull the upper part of the cover so you can release it from the four protruding tabs NOTE Take care not to damage the EMC gasketing that goes around the Touch Panel Assembly especially during re ...

Page 445: ...t of the connector Disconnect the connector right side in Figure 8 126 5 Disconnect the plug on the black cable from the connector on the Main Controller board NOTE The Main Controller Board does not come with the High Voltage Inverter Board BUT it does come with the USB Video Board 6 If you are going to change the Main Controller board you may want to remove the High Voltage Inverter board now Se...

Page 446: ...these steps to install the Main Controller Board 1 Position the Main Controller Board with the USB board plugged in so it aligns with the fixing screw holes in the LCD frame 2 Install the five 5x screws refer to Figure 8 127 3 If removed install the High Voltage Inverter board 4 Connect the three 3x cables refer to Figure 8 126 NOTE Take care not to damage the EMC gasketing that goes around the To...

Page 447: ...ECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CO...

Page 448: ...LTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 114 Section 8 6 Top Console Parts Replacement 8 6 10 1 Preparations cont d 5 Remove the Operator Panel Upper 6 Remove the Main Controller Board ...

Page 449: ...ace with the solder side up The USB Connector Board is plugged into the Main Controller Board 2 Pull the USB Connector Board upwards to disconnect it from the Main Controller Board 8 6 10 3 USB Connector Board installation procedure 1 Install the USB Connector Board 2 Install the Main Controller Board 3 Install the Operator Panel Upper 4 Install the Control Knobs Figure 8 129 Main Controller Board...

Page 450: ...T STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UN...

Page 451: ... fixing screws 3 Remove the High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable 8 6 11 3 High Voltage Inverter Board with Cable installation procedure 1 Align the board s fixing holes to the respective holes on the Main Controller Board 2 Install the two fixing screws Size M 2 5 3 Plug in the cable to the connector on the Main Controller Board 4 Install the Operator Panel Upper 5 Install the Control Knobs Figu...

Page 452: ...moval The Upper Bezel is what is left when you have removed the Frame w LCD and Touch Screen Use the procedure in 8 6 8 2 Remove the Frame w LCD and Touch Screen on page 8 105 to remove the Upper Bezel 8 6 12 2 Upper Bezel installation Use the procedure in 8 6 8 3 Install the Frame w LCD and Touch Screen on page 8 107 to install the Upper Bezel Figure 8 133 Upper Bezel ...

Page 453: ... 7 Remove the Bulkhead Board 8 Remove the Bulkhead Plate WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE AR...

Page 454: ... Bulkhead Plate so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws 3 Install the seven fixing screws as described below The two upper screws are M6 x 20 Torque 8 5 Nm The next screw is M6 x 45 Torque 8 5 Nm The lower left most screw is M6 x 30 Torque 8 5 Nm It is also used for a ground wire not illustrated The three remaining lower screws are M6 x 25 Torque 8 5 Nm Two of the screws are also fixing ...

Page 455: ...down the VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Separate and remove the Storage Tray WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT ...

Page 456: ...ns Holder 8 6 15 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots replacement 8 6 15 1 Tools No tools are needed for this procedure 8 6 15 2 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots removal procedure NOTE If you are going to remove the Upper Operator Panel you only need to remove the five knobs below the Touch Screen 1 Pull the knobs one by one until all knobs have been removed 2 Store the knobs in a clean place Figure 8...

Page 457: ...CE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 123 8 6 15 3 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots installation procedure Install the knobs one by one Refer to the illustration above for the correct position for the knobs Figure 8 136 Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots ...

Page 458: ...VISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9...

Page 459: ... the screws in the next step 2 The screws are available from the underside of the Operator Panel tray Unscrew and remove the four screws used for fixing the Operator Panel assembly to the Operator Panel tray 3 Loosen the screws for the cables grounding on the Bulkhead Bracket and move the OP Cables away from the bracket Figure 8 137 OP seen from below Figure 8 138 OP Cables Grounding 1 Cable A N K...

Page 460: ... 4 On the Bulkhead Bracket loosen the ESD wire from the Lower Panel 5 Pull and lift the Operator Panel assembly up and away Be careful to not destroy the fingers on each side of the Operator Panel Lower 6 Store it on an ESD safe place Figure 8 139 OP Grounding Figure 8 140 Remove OP Panel Lower assembly YELLOW GREEN GROUND WIRE FROM LOWER OP HERE NOT ILLUSTRATED FINGER ...

Page 461: ...ng brackets points as illustrated below Since this feature is for the EMI compatibility the braid have to be exposed under the bracket and the cables have to be well locked by the bracket 4 Install the four fixing screws that fix the Operator Panel assembly to the Operator Panel tray 2 pc M4x25 nearest to the front and 2 pc M4 x 12 at the rear The screws are entered from below the Operator Panel t...

Page 462: ...DS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE ...

Page 463: ...in the correct position and are positioned on different locations on the top and the bottom sides of the ring When used for the Vivid E9 install it so the fixing screw holes on the Fixing Ring allign with the fixing screw holes on the Trackball assembly 2 Install the two fixing screws with washers so it locks the Trackball and Fixing Ring in the correct position 3 Connect signal cable connectors t...

Page 464: ...OURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TU...

Page 465: ...Lower with the front up 3 Unscrew and remove 4 screws 4 Remove the Encoder Board 8 6 18 3 Encoder Board installation procedure 1 Position the Encoder board so the holes for the fixing screws aligns 2 Install the four screws 3 Turn the Operator Panel Lower with the front down 4 Plug in the cable to the Operator Panel Lower 5 Install the Operator Panel Lower 6 Install the Operator Panel Upper Figure...

Page 466: ...ONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT T...

Page 467: ...ch Board with Elastomer removal 1 Disconnect the cable to the Encoder Board 2 Remove the 26 fixing screws 3 Remove the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer Store it in an ESD safe place Figure 8 146 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer Trackball already removed Figure 8 147 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer Trackball already removed ...

Page 468: ...ch Board with Elastomer installation 1 Verify that all switch cups are in their correct positions 2 Position the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer in its correct position 3 Install the 26 fixing screws 4 Connect the cable to the Encoder Board 5 Install the Trackball 6 Install the Operator Panel Lower 7 Install the Operator Panel Upper ...

Page 469: ...148 Lower Bezel WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT ...

Page 470: ...tion on a table or other place where you can keep them until you start the reinstallation If you are going to install a new Lower Bezel you should move the Switch Cups over to the new Lower Bezel one by one 2 When done remove the Lower Bezel WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FO...

Page 471: ... in Figure 8 149 as a reference NOTE THE ILLUSTRATION BELOW IS A MIRRORED ILLUSTRATION USE IT FOR REFERENCE WHEN INSTALLING THE SWITCH CUPS 2 Install the Lower Switch Board with Elastomer 3 Install the Encoder Board 4 Install the Trackball 5 Install the Operator Panel Lower 6 Install the Operator Panel Upper 7 Install the Knobs for Encoders and Slidepots Figure 8 149 Mirrored illustration of the S...

Page 472: ...GRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXP...

Page 473: ... securing the Main Cable 2 Remove the 5 remaining screws securing the Bulkhead Bracket 3 Remove the Bulkhead Bracket 4 From underneath the Frame pull the Main Cables through the Frame opening to free the Frame 5 Remove the Upper Frame 6 Remove two plastic Plate Washers on each side of the Bulkhead Bracket 7 Remove the Lower Operator Panel Frame Figure 8 151 Screw placement Main Cable clamp Figure ...

Page 474: ...tor Panel Frame 2 Install the Upper Frame 3 Install the plastic Plate Washers on both side of the Bulkhead Bracket 4 Position the Bulkhead Bracket 5 Install the 5 screws to secure the Bulkhead Bracket 6 Install the XYZ Buttons Frame 7 Install the Palm Rest 8 Install the Main Cable at the Lower Operator Panel end 9 Install the Bulkhead Board 10 Install the Lower Operator Panel 11 Install the Upper ...

Page 475: ...ustrated in Figure 8 153 The Trackball USB Cable is used on the Operator Panel Lower The USB Video Board Flex Cable and the HV Inverter Cable are both used on the Operator Panel Upper Figure 8 153 The Operator Panel Cable Kit TRACKBALL USB CABLE Connects the Trackball to the Controller board USB VIDEO BOARD FLEX CABLE Connects the Touch Screen to the USB Video board HV INVERTER CABLE Connects the ...

Page 476: ... USB Video Board Flex Cable The USB Video Board Flex Cable is the connection between the USB Video Board and the LCD Touch Display 1 Remove the Rear Cover on the Operator Panel Upper 2 Disconnect both ends of the cable and remove it WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ...

Page 477: ...ower 8 6 22 7 Disconnect the HV Inverter Cable The HV Inverter Cable is the cable between the HV Inverter board and the Main Controller board 1 Remove the Rear Cover on the Operator Panel Upper 2 Disconnect both ends of the cable and remove it 8 6 22 8 Install the HV Inverter Cable 1 Connect the HV Inverter Cable to the HV Inverter board and the other end to the Main Controller board 2 Install the...

Page 478: ...CUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO V...

Page 479: ...rocedure The Alphanumeric Keyboard is installed on a rail below the Operator Panel Follow the steps below to remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly 1 Disconnect the cable plug that is connected to the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly 2 Disconnect the ESD cable Figure 8 155 Alphanumeric Keyboard Figure 8 156 Alphanumeric Keyboard seen from below PLUG LOCK ...

Page 480: ...trated in Figure 8 156 Alphanumeric Keyboard seen from below on page 8 145 4 Move the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly so it un gage then lift it away 8 6 23 4 Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly installation procedure Follow these steps to install the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly 1 Install the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly in the hinges on the rail 2 Tilt the Alphanumeric Keyboard assembly up so it l...

Page 481: ...SD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE B...

Page 482: ... has two holes where you can access two of the fixing tabs to release them 2 Insert a thin screwdriver in one of the provided holes and use it to release the tabs buy pressing as illustrated with the arrow in the figure below 3 Separate the A N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure from the rest of the A N Keyboard Assembly 4 You can now separate the A N Keyboard from the A N Keyboard Top Enclosure by releasi...

Page 483: ...eyboard using the current screw and two additional washers tooth 3 2mm Use one washer under and one washer over the cable shoe Torque 2 3 Nm 2 Install the A N keyboard into the A N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure First position the keyboard under the front clips A then press the rear side of the keyboard under the rear clips B Figure 8 158 Install Ground Cable Figure 8 159 Install A N keyboard into the ...

Page 484: ... the Ground Cable C in the opening of the A N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure 4 Install the A N Keyboard Top Enclosure onto the keyboard by snapping the eight small clips on the Top Enclosure onto the keyboard metal base plate The eight positions are marked in the figure below Figure 8 160 Ground Cable C in the opening of the A N Keyboard Bottom Enclosure Figure 8 161 Install A N Keyboard Top Enclosure ...

Page 485: ...ouch Panel assembly 5 Remove the Lower Operator Panel 6 Remove the Alphanumeric Keyboard Assembly CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE A...

Page 486: ...e the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met Assembly 8 6 25 3 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met Assy installation 1 Position the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met Assy below the UI Console as illustrated in Figure 8 162 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met Assembly on page 8 152 Ensure that the wagon is running free before you tighten the screws in the next step 2 Install the six fixing screws M4 x 8 Torque 2 5 Nm 3 Install the Alphanu...

Page 487: ...et Met Assy 2 Slide the Wagon A N Drawer Sheet Met Assy out of the J Rail 3 If needed repeat this procedure for the other J Rail Assy Figure 8 164 J Rail Assy WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAI...

Page 488: ...b 3 Bend down the tab 4 If needed repeat the three steps above for the other J Rail Assy 5 Position the Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met Assy below the UI Console as illustrated in Figure 8 162 Wagon AN Drawer Sheet Met Assembly on page 8 152 Ensure that the wagon is running free before you tighten the screws in the next step 6 Install the six fixing screws M4 x 8 Torque 2 5 Nm 7 Install the Alphanumeric...

Page 489: ... ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MA...

Page 490: ...oard 3 Remove the Speaker 4 Repeat steps 1 3 for the other Speaker assembly if necessary 8 6 27 3 Install the Speaker Assembly Follow these steps to install the Speakers 1 Position the Speaker 2 Install the hex key screw fixing the Speaker Bracket to the OP frame NOTE Check that the speaker bottom edge is tight or the speaker may rattle 3 Connect the Speaker Cable to the Bulkhead board 4 Repeat st...

Page 491: ... STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNP...

Page 492: ...TION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 158 Section 8 6 Top Console Parts Replacement 8 6 28 1 Preparations cont d 4 Remove five knobs see Figure 8 167 5 Remove the Upper OP Panel Figure 8 167 Remove five knobs ...

Page 493: ...2 Unscrew and remove two screws 3 Remove the Bulkhead Board 8 6 28 3 Install the Bulkhead Board Follow these steps to install the Bulkhead Board 1 Slide the Bulkhead Board into the correct position 2 Install the two screws M3 x 6 Torque 1 2 Nm 3 Install the cables from the Bulkhead Board two short USB cables Bulkhead Board to OP cables to left and right speaker cable from Main Cable 4 Install the ...

Page 494: ...ove the Bulkhead board 8 Remove the Operator Panel Lower WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE AR...

Page 495: ...ead Plate so it aligns with the holes for the fixing screws 2 Install the seven fixing screws as described below The two upper screws are M6 x 20 Torque 8 5 Nm The next screw is M6 x 45 Torque 8 5 Nm The lower left most screw is M6 x 30 Torque 8 5 Nm The three other lower screws are M6 x 25 Torque 8 5 Nm Two of the screws are also fixing the Cable Clamp see Figure 8 170 The Bulkhead Plate on page ...

Page 496: ...s been locked with Lock Tite so you may need to apply a little extra force to unscrew the screw 2 Remove the Cable Hook Twin 8 6 30 2 Install the Cable Hook Twin 1 Position the Cable Hook Twin as shown in Figure 8 171 Cable Hook Twin on page 8 162 2 Fix it in place by using an M5x20 screw with an M6 washer Lock Tite has to be used Torque 50 Ncm fingertight Figure 8 171 Cable Hook Twin SCREW M5X20 ...

Page 497: ...stallation procedure 1 Position the Non Magnetic Touch Latch and fasten it with one screw 2 Install the other screw Ensure that the Non Magnetic Touch Latch works as intended WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG TH...

Page 498: ...le Parts Replacement 8 6 32 Handle Left Top Handle Right Top replacement 8 6 32 1 Preparations 1 Power down the VIVID E9 and disconnect the Mains Power Cable 2 Remove the buttons below the Touch Panel 3 Remove the Upper Operator Panel 4 Remove the Lower Operator Panel Figure 8 172 Handle Left Top ...

Page 499: ...8 165 indicates where the hatches are located 1 Use a thin screwdriver to release the hatches one by one as illustrated in Figure 8 173 Release Hatches on page 8 165 until you can remove the Handle Left Top or Handle Right Top 2 Remove the Handle Left Top or Handle Right Top 3 If needed repeat the previous steps for the other handle 8 6 32 3 Handle Left Top Handle Right Top installation 1 Remove t...

Page 500: ...nd Handle Right Top Figure 8 174 The Palm Rest ASSY WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO ...

Page 501: ...ve the Palm Rest ASSY 8 6 33 3 Palm Rest ASSY installation Follow these steps to install the Palm Rest ASSY 1 Ensure the XYZ Buttons cable runs along the lower tray cable channel so that the cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced 2 Replace the Palm Rest ASSY 3 Install Handle Left Top and Handle Right Top 4 Install the lock mechanisms securing the Palm Rest Cover 5 Replace the Lower Op...

Page 502: ...llowing types of inserts are available Probe Holder Insert STD Probe Holder Insert 3D Probe Holder Softinsert Doppler 8 6 34 2 Manpower One person 1 minute 8 6 34 3 Tools No tools needed 8 6 34 4 Preparations 1 Disconnect and remove all the probes 2 Store the probes in a safe place 8 6 34 5 Removal To remove a Probe Holder Insert grab it and pull or push it upwards 8 6 34 6 Installation To install...

Page 503: ...nt procedures 8 169 8 6 35 Replacing the Gel Cup The Gel Cup is a soft insert used for storing the gel bottle on the scanner so it is easy to access during scanning For replacement see 8 6 34 Replacing the Probe Holder Inserts on page 8 168 Figure 8 176 Gel Cup used on both sides GEL CUP ...

Page 504: ...bilize the console Toggle one of the buttons marked 2 to reposition the Z vertical location of the upper console Toggle up to raise or down to lower the console Figure 8 177 Top Console adjustment controls Figure 8 178 XYZ Buttons WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE AD...

Page 505: ... of the Lower Op Panel frame handle 2 Connect the cable to the XYZ Buttons Frame 3 Ensure the XYZ Buttons Frame cable runs along the Lower Op Panel cable channel so that the cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced see Figure 8 117 4 Replace the Palm Rest 5 Replace the Handle Top Left and Handle Top Right 6 Replace the Lower Operator Panel 7 Replace the Upper OP Panel Touch Panel assemb...

Page 506: ...IONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT ...

Page 507: ...tton IF Board installation procedure 1 Install the Button IF Board into the UI Frame Lower by pressing it under the small hooks 2 Ensure the XYZ Buttons Frame cable runs along the Lower Op Panel cable channel so that the cable is not pinched when the Palm Rest is replaced see Figure 8 117 3 Install the Handle Left Top and Handle Right Top 4 Replace the Palm Rest 5 Replace the Lower Operator Panel ...

Page 508: ...wer 9 Remove the Bulkhead Board 10 Remove the Bulkhead Plate 11 Remove the Upper Frame Assembly 12 Remove the Lower Frame Assembly WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER P...

Page 509: ...5 8 7 1 2 XY Mechanism removal procedure 1 From the rear side of the VIVID E9 remove the four 4x fixing screws 2 Remove the XY mechanism Figure 8 180 Operator Panels have been removed Figure 8 181 Remove screws for the XY Frogleg mechanism NOTE MAIN CABLE IS NOT SHOWN IN THIS PICTURE REMOVE FOUR 4X SCREWS ...

Page 510: ...e Lower Frame Assembly NOTE Ensure that Bumper Z enters the slide at the back before tighten the screws 4 Install the Upper Frame Assembly 5 Install the Bulkhead Plate 6 Install the Bulkhead Board 7 Install the Operator Panel Lower 8 Install the Operator Panel Upper 9 Install the LCD Arm assembly 10 Install the LCD Monitor assembly 11 Install the LCD Rear Cover If it is difficult to lock the XY me...

Page 511: ...r down the VIVID E9 3 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 4 Disconnect all probes and external I O cabling Figure 8 182 XY Brake Assy WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN C...

Page 512: ...nscrew and remove the fixing screw for the XY Brake Assy 5 Remove the brake retainer screw 6 Disconnect the brake motor wire connector 7 Using a 3 mm L Allen wrench slide the short L end of the wrench between the motor and the metal part of the brake ramp The short L end should be visible as shown in Figure 8 185 BE CAREFUL not to pinch the brake motor wires See Figure 8 186 XY Brake Allen wrench ...

Page 513: ... procedure cont d 8 Gently but firmly pull down on the long end of the allen wrench The brake assembly will slide out of the slot it mates with in the brake shoe NOTE Figure 8 186 shows the XY brake removed and demonstrates placement of the Allen wrench Figure 8 185 XY Brake Removal Figure 8 186 XY Brake Allen wrench placement reference ...

Page 514: ...st be replaced 1 Position the XY Brake Assy into the arm You may need to turn the axle on the motor by hand to adjust the lever so it fits 2 Install the fixing screw for the XY Brake Assy 3 Connect the cable from the motor to the XY Brake cable 4 Position the Cover so it aligns with the hole s for the fixing screw s 5 Install the fixing screws The covers for the front legs are fixed with one screw...

Page 515: ...rk Lock removal 1 Remove four screws 2 Carefully pull out the XY Park Lock assembly 3 Disconnect the cable at the connector 4 Remove the XY Park Lock assembly 8 7 3 3 XY Park Lock installation 1 Install the cable from the XY Park Lock assembly in the assigned connector 2 Position the XY Park Lock assembly 3 Install the four screws 8 7 3 4 Verification Verify that the XY locks and unlocks as intend...

Page 516: ...11 Remove the Upper Frame Assembly 12 Remove the Lower Frame Assembly 13 Remove the XY Frogleg Assembly 14 Remove the XYZ Control Box Figure 8 189 Z Mechanism WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAI...

Page 517: ...8 7 4 2 Z Mechanism removal procedure The Z Mechanism is fastened with several screws 1 Remove four 4x screws from the lower part of the Z Mechanism 2 Remove four 4x screws 3 Lift the Z Mechanism away Figure 8 190 Remove four 4x screws Figure 8 191 Remove four 4x screws Figure 8 192 Lift the Z Mechanism away ...

Page 518: ...ll two 2x M6x16 Countersunk and two 2x M6x16 screws 3 Install four 4x M6x16 lower part of unit 4 Install the XY Frogleg Mechanism 5 Install the Lower Frame Assembly 6 Install the Upper Frame Assembly 7 Install the Bulkhead Plate 8 Install the Bulkhead Board 9 Install the Operator Panel Lower 10 Install the Operator Panel Upper 11 Install the LCD Arm assembly 12 Install the LCD Monitor assembly 13 ...

Page 519: ...gure 8 193 Drive Gear Assembly WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY...

Page 520: ...r operate the Z release lever when pulling or move the Top Console slightly up or down to make the wheel disengage from the gear 8 7 5 3 Drive Gear Assembly installation procedure 1 Position the Drive Gear Assembly in the correct position You may need to either operate the Z release lever when positioning or move the Top Console slightly up or down to engage the teeth on the wheel with the teeth o...

Page 521: ...edures 8 187 8 7 5 3 Drive Gear Assembly installation procedure cont d 3 Connect the cable from the motor to the XYX Control Box 4 Power up the unit and verify that the XYZ function as intended 5 Power down the unit 6 Install the Top Cover 7 Install the Rear Cover 8 Install the Right side Cover ...

Page 522: ...ure 8 197 XYZ Control Assembly WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY...

Page 523: ... Control Assembly forwards up and away from the bracket 8 7 6 3 XYZ Control Assembly installation procedure 1 Thread the XYZ Control Assembly into position 2 Install the three screws at the top rear M6x16 sunken Torque 9 8 Nm 3 Install the two remaining screws on the top M4x8 sunken Torque 4 9 Nm 4 Connect the cables to the XYZ Control Assembly 5 Install the Top Cover 6 Install the Rear Cover 7 In...

Page 524: ...1 Purpose of this section This section describes how to replace the replaceable parts in the Main Console 8 8 2 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement 8 8 2 1 Preparations When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Remove the Filter Cover ...

Page 525: ... air filters which need to be cleaned The top air filter is located on the back of the VIVID E9 below the power cord and the bottom air filter is located underneath the VIVID E9 Follow these steps to remove and clean the rear filter and the handle type bottom filter Table 8 5 Removing and cleaning filters sheet 1 of 3 Steps Corresponding Graphic 1 Power down the VIVID E9 before removing the filter...

Page 526: ...e the filter B Bottom Filter Remove the Filter Assembly by lowering the handle NOTE The handle for the bottom filter is located in the same location for both Filter Assemblies 4 Clean the Rear Filter after it is removed by removing excess lint or dust from the soiled side or vacuum if necessary Table 8 5 Removing and cleaning filters cont d sheet 2 of 3 Steps Corresponding Graphic ...

Page 527: ...y use a clean soft brush or vacuum 6 Reinstall the rear filter and tuck the edges of the filter under the Rear Bumper and Rear Cover Reinstall Filter Cover 7 Reinstall Bottom Filter by positioning the filter under the VIVID E9 and placing the handle into the stowed position The filter will be drawen to the filter mounting magnets Table 8 5 Removing and cleaning filters cont d sheet 3 of 3 Steps Co...

Page 528: ... removal procedure Grab the Filter and remove it CAUTION ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 2 UNPLUG THE SYSTEM 3 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG 4 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION Beware that...

Page 529: ...eplacement procedures 8 195 8 8 3 3 Filter installation procedure Follow these steps to install the Filter 1 Install the Filter 2 Tuck the edges of the filter under the Rear Bumper and Rear Cover 3 Install the Filter Cover Figure 8 199 Tuck Filter behind Rear Bumper and Rear edges ...

Page 530: ...e tab can be accessed on the right side of the VIVID E9 8 8 4 2 Preparations 1 Power down the VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Kneeling down on the right side of the VIVID E9 enables you to access the air filter tab 4 Locate the tab extending from the air filter on the bottom of the VIVID E9 Figure 8 200 Bottom nylon strip Air Filter CAUTION Lock the VIVID E9 s wh...

Page 531: ...lter by rinsing with water allow it to dry completely before re installing When dry install the filter as described next 8 8 4 5 Filter installation procedure Install the filter at the bottom of the VIVID E9 Align it in position see the tab in Figure 8 202 The magnets will help to position it correct Figure 8 201 Release of the bottom air filter CAUTION DO NOT operate the unit without the air filt...

Page 532: ...WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PA...

Page 533: ...ard Rack Cover 2 Unscrew the thumb screws of the Card Rack Cover 3 Remove the Card Rack Cover 4 Pull the Fan Assembly out of the frame 8 8 5 3 Fan Assembly installation procedure Follow these steps to install the Fan Assembly 1 Align the Fan Assembly with the rails in the frame and push it into position 2 Install the Card Rack Cover 3 Install the thumb screws of the Card Rack Cover 4 Connect the P...

Page 534: ...ervice manual 2 Remove the rubber bushings that holds the old fan screens 3 Remove the old fan screen and fan screen frame 8 8 6 2 Install the new Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame 1 Place the new fan screen and fan screen frame ontop of the fan 2 Place the rivet bushing into the frame screen hole Figure 8 204 Remove Rubber Bushings Figure 8 205 New Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame ontop of the fan F...

Page 535: ...ocedures 8 201 8 8 6 2 Install the new Fan Screen and Fan Screen Frame cont d 3 Hold the frame screen firmly down onto the fan 4 Press the rivet pin firmly down to secure the fan screen 5 Install the Fan Drawer back into the VIVID E9 Figure 8 207 Hold the frame screen firmly down onto the fan ...

Page 536: ...CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAI...

Page 537: ...Operator Panel Upper 2 Disconnect the HDMI cable from the Bulkhead 3 Disconnect the cable from the Z switch Up Down control 4 If not already done unscrew the fixing screws on the Ground GND Clamp on the Bulkhead Bracket so you can release the cables from the clamp Two cables are connected to the XY Frog brakes They are routed to connectors inside the rear XY Frog legs To disconnect these cables fo...

Page 538: ...8 2 03 86 0LFUR RQWUROOHU 2 3RUWV 93 86 86 86 6 1 VWE 9 5 8 2 287 21 2 6 3 5 2 2 5 9 9 8 2 5 5 5 7 7 7 5 5 5 3 1 6 1 8 2 02725 5 9 02725 175 5 219 57 56 32 5 725 255 7 21 62 7 21 1 9 19 57 5 21752 5 5 52 5 6 21752 5 9 9 9 9 9 VWE 5 5 3 1 11 5 7 5 0 1 32 5 6833 38 6 5 92 7 6 86 8 237 21 02725 72 35 17 56 5 9 9 3 7 17 2 237 21 86 23 3 1 86 5 9 9 9 9 9 2 17 7 6 5 1 9 19 21752 5 2 5 8 2 5 9 86 86 8 2 ...

Page 539: ...D ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 M...

Page 540: ...E MANUAL 8 206 Section 8 8 Main Console parts replacement 8 8 8 2 Sub Woofer removal procedure Follow these steps to remove the Sub woofer 1 Remove the six 6x hex key screws securing the Sub woofer to the chassis 2 Remove the Sub woofer Figure 8 211 Sub woofer ...

Page 541: ...r in position at the base of the chassis 2 Install the six 6x hex key screws securing the Sub woofer to the chassis 3 Replace the BEP 8 8 8 4 Verification Perform the following steps to verify that the product is functioning as intended after this replacement 1 Power up the VIVID E9 2 Turn the volume control on at the OP Panel 3 Select PW mode and press on the selected probe to ensure the sub woof...

Page 542: ... WARNING WARNING AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS WHEELS OR ADJUSTING BRAKES WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECON...

Page 543: ...12 6 Activate the brakes 7 The VIVID E9 is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster 8 Make the VIVID E9 rest on both Front Casters and lift the Rear Caster Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis This will stabilize the VIVID E9 with one Rear Caster free from the floor This Rear Caster can now be removed 9 Unscrew and remove the fixing bolt Save the bolt for later use 10 Remove the...

Page 544: ...Install the fixing bolt M12 X 40 mm Use a 10 mm HEX key Torque 130 Nm 3 Remove the Wooden Wedge 4 Roll the VIVID E9 off the Bevel Edged Board 5 To replace the other Rear Caster repeat all the steps starting from 8 9 1 3 Rear Casters removal procedure on page 8 209 but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of the VIVID E9 6 Install the Rear Cover 7 Install the Rear ...

Page 545: ...ot Rest Bumper WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE A...

Page 546: ...Figure 8 212 6 The VIVID E9 is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster 7 Make the VIVID E9 rest on both Rear Casters and lift the Front Caster 8 Put the Wooden Wedge under the chassis This will stabilize the VIVID E9 with one Front Caster free from the floor 9 Unscrew and remove the fixing screws for the Front Caster that is free from the floor Save the screw for later use 10 Rem...

Page 547: ...h the fastening screw 2 Install the three fixing screws M8 x 20 mm Torque 20 5 Nm 3 Remove the Wooden Wedge 4 Roll the VIVID E9 off the Bevel Edged Board 5 To replace the other Front Caster repeat all the steps from 8 9 2 3 Front Casters removal procedure on page 8 212 but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of the VIVID E9 6 Install the Foot Rest Cover ...

Page 548: ...Front Cover Figure 8 214 Pedal Mechanism Assembly WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TE...

Page 549: ...s Torque 20 5 Nm 2 Connect the rods by snapping on the ball joints 3 Verify that the pedals work as intended a Push down brake pedal from free position release it and verify the pedal to return quickly up to half position b Try to move the VIVID E9 back and forward and verify that the brake pedal stay in brake mode c Push down direction lock pedal and verify the pedal to return quickly d Move VIVI...

Page 550: ...ex key screws from below 1 Unscrew and remove the four screws 2 Remove the Brake Pedal WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPAC...

Page 551: ... the four fixing screws 8 9 5 Pedal Release replacement This pedal placed in the middle is fixed with three screws With this in mind please refer to 8 9 4 Brake Pedal replacement on page 8 216 for replacement instructions 8 9 6 Pedal Dir Lock replacement This pedal is fixed to the Pedal Mechanism in the same manner as the Brake Pedal Please refer to 8 9 4 Brake Pedal replacement on page 8 216 for ...

Page 552: ...F VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK VIVID E9 MUST BE TURNED OFF AVOID ALL CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS ALWAYS USE NON CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND ...

Page 553: ...2 CARD POSITION ABBREVIATION CARD NAME TOTAL NUMBER OF CARDS PER SYSTEM BT 09 BT 11 BT 12 SW v108 x x SW v110 0 0 to v110 1 3 SW v110 1 4 or higher SW v112 0 x 1 RLY RELAY BOARD 1x 1x 1x 1x 2 GRX64 ANALOG RECEIVER BOARD 1x 1x 1x 1x 3 GRX128 ANALOG RECEIVER BOARD 1x 1x 1x 1x 4 GTX TLP192 TRANSMITTER BOARD NOT USED NOT USED 1x 1x 5 GTX TLP3 TRANSMITTER BOARD 4x NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED 6 GTX TLP3 ...

Page 554: ...D 11 DRX DIGITAL RECEIVER BOARD 12 GFI GLOBAL RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFACE 1x 1x 1x 1x N A FRONT PLANE XD BUS FOR GTX TLP3 THE FRONT PLANE BOARDS CONNECT TO THE BACK OF THE RELAY BOARD THE GTX BOARD S AND THE GRX BOARDS 2x 2x NOT USED NOT USED FRONT PLANE XD BUS FOR GTX TLP192 NOT USED NOT USED 2x 2x Table 8 6 FEP Cards per VIVID E9 cont d sheet 2 of 2 CARD POSITION ABBREVIATION CARD NAME TOTAL NUMBE...

Page 555: ...O TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WR...

Page 556: ...is used to ground the PCIe GFI cable to the FEP cover 1 Unscrew the fixing screw for the cover for the PCIe GFI cable 2 Remove the cover for the PCIe cable 3 Unplug the PCIe Cable 4 Unscrew the FEP Cover s ten fixing screws 5 Remove the FEP Cover Figure 8 217 EMI cover for PCIe cable Figure 8 218 FEP Cover s fixing screws EMI cover for PCIe cable Fixing screw for PCIe cable PCIe GFI cable ...

Page 557: ...tighten the finger screws 1 Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with the ten fixing screws Use your fingers to tighten the screws 2 Plug in the PCIe cable in the GFI board The connector on the GFI card is available through the opening in the FEP Cover 3 Install the EMI cover for the PCIe cable 4 Fasten the EMI cover for the PCIe cable with the M4 fixing screw 5 Install the side cover ...

Page 558: ...E DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 224 Section 8 10 Front End Processor FEP Card Cage parts replacement 8 10 3 Front Plane XD BUS replacement Figure 8 219 Front Plane cards FRONT PLANE CARDS ...

Page 559: ...Y ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVIS...

Page 560: ...steps to remove the Front Plane Boards NOTICE Read through the removal and installation steps completely before performing Perform the steps carefully to avoid damage to the Front Plane Board connectors These steps help unseat the Front Plane Boards from the other boards 1 Start by pulling out the Relay Board slightly 2 Secondly pull the RX Board slightly out 3 Repeat once more for the Relay Board...

Page 561: ...Board and GTX Board s are returned to proper position before installing the Front Plane Board 4 Repeat the same also for the RX Board 5 Holding the upper and lower edges of the upper Front Plane Board with both hands rock the upper Front Plane Board evenly away from the GRLY and RX boards Be careful not to bend the connector pins 6 Repear the previous step for the Lower Front Plane Board ...

Page 562: ...boards 2 Holding the upper and lower edges of the board with both hands carefully install the lower Front Plane Board Ensure that you do not bend any of the connector pins during the installation Be sure to apply even pressure across the board and to apply gentle even pressure at the 4 corners of the Front Plane Board to make full contact with the other boards 3 Repeat step 2 for the other Front P...

Page 563: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 229 8 10 4 Relay Board RLY replacement Figure 8 220 Relay Board location RELAY BOARD ...

Page 564: ... NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM ...

Page 565: ...n the Relay Board with the rails and push it Push the card to the left so it enters correct in the mechanical slide before you push it in position so it is seated in the Back Plane connectors 2 Carefully install the two Front Plane Boards 3 Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with its fixing screws 4 Plug in the PCIe GFI Cable 5 Install the cover for the PCIe cable 6 Install the Right Side Cover 8...

Page 566: ...CARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 232 Section 8 10 Front End Processor FEP Card Cage parts replacement 8 10 5 Receiver Board GRX replacement Figure 8 221 GRX Boards location GRX BOARDS ...

Page 567: ...NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM W...

Page 568: ...ion nearest the GFI the 64 channel board GRX64 is positioned in the left hand position Follow these steps to install the GRX Board 1 Carefully align the GRX Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane connectors 2 Carefully install the two Front Plane Boards 3 Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with its fixing screws 4 Plug in the PCIe GFI Cable 5 Install the cover for...

Page 569: ...235 8 10 6 Transmitter Board GTX replacement 8 10 6 1 Overview Two different GTX board models have been used GTX TLP 3 0 This board has 64 TX channels GTX TLP192 This board has 192 TX channels NOTE When a GTX TLP192 is used it is occupying the rightmost TX slot Figure 8 222 GTX Boards location GTX BOARDS ...

Page 570: ...ERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE A...

Page 571: ...E HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 8 Replacement procedures 8 237 8 10 6 2 Preparations cont d 8 Remove the FEP Cover 9 Carefully remove the two Front Plane Boards ...

Page 572: ...8 10 6 4 GTX Board installation procedure Follow these steps to install the GTX Board NOTE If a GTX TLP192 is used it must be positioned in the right most TX slot 1 Carefully align the GTX Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane connectors 2 Carefully install the two Front Plane Boards 3 Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with its fixing screws 4 Plug in the PCIe G...

Page 573: ...NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM W...

Page 574: ...X Board installation procedure Follow these steps to install the DRX Board 1 Carefully align the DRX Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane connectors 2 Install the DRX Shield 3 Install the FEP Cover and fasten it with its fixing screws 4 Plug in the PCIe GFI Cable 5 Install the cover for the PCIe cable 6 Install the Right Side Cover 8 10 7 4 Calibration and adjust...

Page 575: ...OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIR...

Page 576: ...ard 1 Carefully align the GFI Board with the rails and push it in till it is seated in the Back Plane connectors 2 Install the FEP Cover 3 Install the FEP Cover s fixing screws 4 Plug in the PCIe GFI Cable 5 Install the cover for the PCIe cable 6 Install the Right Side Cover 8 10 8 4 Calibration and adjustments Calibrate the Front End as described in Section 6 6 DC Offset Calibration Front End Ali...

Page 577: ...DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNEC...

Page 578: ...GE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING WHEN YOU RETURN THE USED BEP TO YOUR LOCAL PARTS ORGANIZATION MAKE SURE YOU REMOVE ALL PATIENT DATA FROM THE HARD DRI...

Page 579: ...s and Service settings 4 If possible wipe the HDD partitions as described here Reload the system software from DVD Select A to overwrite all content on HDD 5 Power down the VIVID E9 6 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 7 Disconnect all probes 8 Remove the Side Covers 9 Remove the Top Cover 10 Remove the B W Printer Disconnect the Power Cable from the rear of the printer Disconne...

Page 580: ... to the top of the BEP WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT Figure 8 224 Printer Bracket BEP6 Figure 8 ...

Page 581: ...nger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 8 Remove the Printer Bracket from the BEP 9 Remove the two hex key screws at the inside base of the BEP 10 Reach insi...

Page 582: ... BEP is a BEP6 you can move over the Graphics Adapter If the BEP you removed was a BEP5 and the new BEP is a BEP5 you can move over the Graphics Adapter If the BEP you removed was a BEP5 and the new BEP is a BEP6 you must also order a new Graphics Adapter WARNING WARNING BEFORE YOU DISPOSE OF THE HARD DRIVE OR RETURN THE BEP TO THE LOCAL PARTS ORGANIZATION MAKE SURE YOU REMOVE ALL PATIENT DATA FRO...

Page 583: ...ne on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 5 Replace the Printer Bracket at the top of the BEP Be sure the lip on the underside of the bracket hooks on the edge of the Card Rack and the 3 tabs insert into the slots on the top of the BEP frame The lip clamps the Card Rack and BEP together This is a tight fit 6 Lower the Lower Column Cover 7 ...

Page 584: ...5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 8 250 Section 8 11 Back End Processor BEP parts replacement 8 11 1 6 Calibration and adjustments Calibrate the Front End A D converters as described in Section 6 6 DC Offset Calibration Front End Alignment on page 6 11 ...

Page 585: ... Cover aside WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR ...

Page 586: ... of the BEP6 Power Board Assembly 2 Remove the two screws that secure the BEP6 Power Board Assembly 3 Slide the BEP6 Power Board Assembly out of the BEP You will need to apply some force use the two brackets as handles Refer the two small yellow rings in Figure 8 228 BEP6 Power Board Assembly removal above 4 To install the BEP6 Power Board Assembly go to 8 11 2 3 Install the BEP6 Power Board Assem...

Page 587: ...EP frame 3 Plug in the cable plug in the connector near the top of the BEP6 Power Board Assembly 4 Install the BEP Cover as described in these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger ...

Page 588: ...wer Supply 2 Gently insert a flat screwdriver between the power supply and the BEP frame to create enough space to get hold on the power supply 3 Pull the Power Supply toward you while gently rocking the board up and down freeing the 2 pins connected at the back of the board 4 To install the BEP5 Power Supply go to 8 11 2 5 Install BEP5 Power Supply on page 8 255 Figure 8 229 BEP Power Supply Fixi...

Page 589: ...upply to the BEP frame 3 Install the BEP Cover as described in these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips ...

Page 590: ...FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING BEFORE YOU DISPOSE OF THE HARD DRIVE MAKE SURE YOU REMOVE ALL PATIENT DATA FROM THE HARD DRIVE GIVEN THAT THE HARD DRIVE IS STILL FUNCTIONAL IN SOME COUNTRIES YOU MAY BE REQUIRED TO DELETE ALL SOFTWARE FROM THE DISK BEFORE RETURNING THE HARD DRIVE TO THE PARTS WAREHOUSE FOLLOW YOUR LOCAL POLICIES WARNING WA...

Page 591: ...Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 6 Disconnect all external cables probes ECG physio ethernet audio video USB 7 Remove the Left Side Cover 8 Remove the BEP Cover a Loosen the BEP Cover s fixing screw s On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one fin...

Page 592: ...1 3 2 BEP6 Hard Disk Drive HDD removal procedure Follow these steps to remove the HDD 1 Disconnect the cables connecting the HDD 2 Remove the two screws that secures the HDD Bracket to the BEP s frame 3 Get hold of the HDD assembly see figure below and pull it out Figure 8 231 BEP6 HDD screws Figure 8 232 Pull out the HDD assembly ...

Page 593: ... top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 5 Replace the Left Side Cover 6 Connect the Mains Power Cable to the wall outlet...

Page 594: ...ve HDD removal procedure Follow these steps to remove the HDD 1 Remove the screw that secures the HDD bracket 2 Swing the HDD bracket out 3 Disconnect the cables connecting the HDD 4 Lift the bracket up freeing the hinge tabs from the slots Figure 8 233 BEP Hard Disk Drive screw Figure 8 234 BEP Hard Disk Drive SCREW SECURES HDD BRACKET HDD BRACKET HINGES ...

Page 595: ...ng screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 6 Replace the side cover 7 Connect the Mains Power Cable to the wall outlet 8 Power up the VIVID E9 9 Install the System software and the Ap...

Page 596: ...D BT 12 with BEP5 without 4D Prolink Add 2 card NOTE On BEP6 without 4D the graphics circuits Intel HD Graphics and Intel Graphics Media Accelerator are included on the BEP s motherboard A Video Bypass Board is plugged into the graphics port for signal routing purpose BT 11 scanners These Graphics Adapters are used depending on the VIVID E9 BT 11 model BT 11 with 4D Nvidia Quadro FX1800 or Nvidia ...

Page 597: ... SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION...

Page 598: ...ve the Left Side Cover 5 Remove the BEP Cover a Loosen the BEP Cover s fixing screw s On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Next ...

Page 599: ...procedure 2 Unscrew the fixing screws from the connector at top of the Graphics Adapter If DVR is installed the flex between the Graphics Adapter and the DVR board uses finger screws Without DVR the flex from the motherboard is fixed with Hex screws 3 Disconnect the plug 4 Remove the fixing screw for the Graphics Adapter 5 Pull out the Graphics Adapter Figure 8 235 Graphics Adapter position in BEP...

Page 600: ...Follow these steps to install the new Graphics Adapter 1 Plug in the new Graphics Adapter 2 Insert and fasten the fixing screw 3 Plug in the cables you removed earlier Connections if DVR is installed in the BEP6 Connection if the BEP6 is without DVR 4 Install the fixing screws you removed earlier 5 Install the HDD DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil DVI Samtech Flex DVR Audio DVI SAMTECH FLEX ...

Page 601: ...inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 7 Replace the Left Side Cover 8 Connect the Mains Power...

Page 602: ... described in these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the...

Page 603: ...BEP s motherboard 2 If a locking mechanism is installed on the connector on the BEP s motherboard push the plastic slider down to release the Graphics Adapter 3 Unplug and remove the Graphics Adapter Store it in an ESD safe place Figure 8 236 Remove fixing screw disconnect cables 1 Fixing screw for HDD bracket 2 Two cables to the HDD Table 8 7 Disconnect the cables from the Graphics Adapter BEP5 G...

Page 604: ... Graphics Adapter Add2 3 DVR Board stipulated position to the left installed to the right 4 DVI Out cable 5 DVI Flex Main cable 6 SATA cable Don t disconnect in this procedure Figure 8 238 Cables on the ATI FireGL V7200 card BEP5 1 I O Unit 2 Graphics Adapter ATI FireGL V7200 3 DVR Board stipulated position to the left installed to the right 4 DVI Out cable 5 DVI Flex Jumper X cable 6 SATA cable D...

Page 605: ... Quadro FX1800 Nvidia Quadro 2000D BEP5 Figure 8 239 Cables on the Nvidia Quadro FX1800 Nvidia Quadro 2000D card BEP5 1 I O Unit 2 Graphics Adapter Nvidia Quadro FX1800 Nvidia Quadro 2000D 3 DVR Board stipulated position to the left installed to the right 4 DVI Out cable 5 DVI Flex Main cable 6 SATA cable Don t disconnect in this procedure ...

Page 606: ...f the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 7 Install the Left Side Cover Table 8 8 Connect the cables to the Graphics Adapter BEP...

Page 607: ...NNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN ...

Page 608: ...is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside NOTE BEP5 Remove the HDD to get better access Ref 8 11 3 Hard Disk Drive HDD replacement on page 8 256 3 BEP6 only Remove the Graphics Adapter to get better access 4 BEP5 Disconnect the cables at the back of the Front Module BEP6 Disconnect the Front Module Cable from the mot...

Page 609: ...nstall the BEP Cover as described in these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and ...

Page 610: ... AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF ...

Page 611: ...nd one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Remove the BEP and place it on a table Related information 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 38 8 11 1 Back End Processor BEP replacement on page 8 244 8 11 6 4 Back End Process...

Page 612: ...ve thin rubber from the rubber fastner 6 Plug in the fan s plug to the connector on the motherboard 7 Install the BEP in the VIVID E9 8 You may want to power up the VIVID E9 for a short time just to check that the new fan is running OK and running blowing the correct way before you continue Turn the VIVID E9 off again as soon as possible within a few minutes due to the risk of overheating when the...

Page 613: ...le 1 Power down the VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all probes and external cables 4 Remove the Left Side Cover 5 Remove the Top Cover 6 Remove the B W Printer 7 For easier access in the next steps remove the Front Cover 8 Remove the BEP and place it on a table for easy access 9 Remove the HDD assembly 8 11 7 3 BEP Power In Cable removal Follow these s...

Page 614: ...2 on the BEP6 Power Board 2 Install the J1 connector in the frame with the two screws from below and the nuts above 3 Install the HDD Bracket Ensure that the BEP Power In Cable is routed above the HDD Bracket before you fix it to the frame with the four Phillips screws from above 4 Install the HDD 5 Install the BEP in the VIVID E9 6 Install all the cables to the BEP 7 Install the BEP Cover 8 Insta...

Page 615: ...s 4 Remove the Left Side Cover 5 Remove the BEP Cover a Loosen the BEP Cover s fixing screw s On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside...

Page 616: ...s 4 Remove the Left Side Cover 5 Remove the BEP Cover a Loosen the BEP Cover s fixing screw s On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside...

Page 617: ...ce Cable 1 Connect the two connectors Power and USB to the Patient I O 2 Connect the other end of the cable to CN USB11 on the BEP s motherboard 3 Install the BEP Power Board 4 Install the BEP Cover 5 Install the Left Side Cover CAUTION BE AWARE OF CORRECT ORIENTATION OF THE PATIENT I O CABLE CONNECTOR WHEN CONNECTING TO CN USB11 ON THE BEP S MOTHERBOARD ON SOME BEPS THE KEYING TO PREVENT ERROR MA...

Page 618: ...ews on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Related information 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 38 8 11 10 2 Video Jumper Fle...

Page 619: ...ews on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Related information 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 38 8 11 11 2 DVI to Samtec Ju...

Page 620: ...Flex es 4D with DVR Install the DVI to Samtec Jumper Flex between CN DV12 on the MBD and DVI OUT on the DVR board 4D without DVR Install the DVI to Samtec Jumper Flex between CN DV12 on the MBD and the Graphics Adapter 2D with DVR 1 Install one DVI to Samtec Jumper Flex between CN DV12 on the MBD and DVI OUT on the DVR board 2 Install one DVI to Samtec Jumper Flex between CN DV11 on the MBD and DV...

Page 621: ...the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Remove the BEP and place it on a table Related information 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 38 8 11 1 Back End Processor BEP replacement on page 8 244 8 11 12 2 SATA Cable DVR to BEP6 MBD removal Follow these steps to remove the SATA Cable DVR to BEP6 MBD ...

Page 622: ...nd one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Related information 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 38 8 11 13 2 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil removal 1 Disconnect one end of the DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil from the connector on the ...

Page 623: ...one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 Related information 4 2 2 Power shut down on page 4 8 8 5 2 Side Covers replacement on page 8 38 8 11 14 2 DVR Audio cable removal 1 Disconnect one end of the DVR Audio cable from the connector on the ...

Page 624: ...ns When preparing for the replacement you must perform the following steps 1 Power down the VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all probes 4 Remove the Left Side Cover 5 Remove the BEP Cover a Loosen the BEP Cover s fixing screw s On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP...

Page 625: ...now remove the BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable 8 11 15 3 BEP6 to GFI and Card Rack Backplane Cable installation 1 Connect the Boundary Scan Cable to the FEP Backplane Connector 2 Connect the PCIE L5 plug to the PCIE L5 Connector on the BEP Motherboard 3 Position the Chassis Connector in the cut out in the chassis and fasten it with the 3 mm screw 4 Plug in the GFI PCIe Cable in the Chass...

Page 626: ...F VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF...

Page 627: ...wer supply 2 Remove the three screws that secure the Main Power Supply 3 Ease the Main Power Supply away from the fang bracket 4 Pull slide the entire Main Power Supply backwards until the connectors to the Front End Processor are unseated 5 Lift the Main Power Supply away Figure 8 245 Main Power Supply Figure 8 246 Main Power Supply cables Main Power Supply SCREW PLACEMENT AC OUTPUT TO PERIPHERAL...

Page 628: ...lt the top of the Main Power Supply toward the rear of the Card Cage until the Main Power Supply is vertical 2 Slide the Main Power Supply forward to seat the connectors on the Card Cage 3 Engage the tab onto the Fang 4 Install the three screws 5 Connect the cables at the top of the Main Power Supply 6 Install the Rear Cover 7 Install the Filter Cover 8 Install the Top Cover 9 Install both Side Co...

Page 629: ...SED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4...

Page 630: ... remove the Patient I O module 1 Inside the BEP there is an opening for the Power and USB cables to the Patient I O module Disconnect the Power cable connector and the USB cable connector from the Patient I O module 2 Remove one screw inside the BEP 3 Remove the two fastening screws on the Patient I O module s mounting bracket 4 Pull the Patient I O module sideways out of the frame 8 13 1 3 Patien...

Page 631: ...r rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 7 Install the Left Side Cover see 8 5 2 3 Side ...

Page 632: ... Cover aside WARNING WARNING DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS 1 ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF VIA AN ARM WRIST STRAP TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER NEAR THE POWER CONNECTOR 2 FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR ...

Page 633: ...ow these steps to remove the BEP6 Side I O Board Assembly 1 Disconnect the cables connected to the face of the BEP6 Side I O Board Assembly 2 Remove the four screws connecting the BEP6 Side I O Board Assembly to the BEP 3 Pull the BEP6 Side I O Board Assembly out of the BEP Figure 8 249 Position of screws two are hidden by cables one is behind the BEP Cover ...

Page 634: ... 4 Reconnect the I O cabling 5 Install the BEP Cover as described in these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phi...

Page 635: ...oard Assembly 1 Disconnect the cables inside the BEP that connect to the I O Flat cable from the Video Graphics board 2 Remove the five screws connecting the I O to the BEP 3 Reach inside the BEP frame to pull the I O Board Assembly out of the BEP 4 Set the I O Board Assembly aside Figure 8 250 BEP5 I O Board Assembly s screw placement Figure 8 251 Remove the BEP5 I O Board Assembly SCREWS ...

Page 636: ...he BEP to the I O Board Flat cable from the Video Graphics board 5 Reconnect the I O cabling 6 Install the BEP Cover as described in these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phi...

Page 637: ... VIVID E9 2 Disconnect the Mains Power Cable from the wall outlet 3 Disconnect all probes and external I O cabling 4 Remove the Side Covers 5 Remove the Top Cover WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4...

Page 638: ...uring the left side of the DVD R W drive 5 Disconnect the cables to the DVD R W drive 6 Slide the DVD R W drive out the front of the VIVID E9 7 If Power Connection is different on new and old DVD R W drive Move the DVD Interface Board Part Number 5301204 from the old DVD R W drive that you removed to the new DVD R W drive 8 14 1 3 DVD R W drive installation procedure Follow these steps to install ...

Page 639: ... ELECTRICAL SHOCK VIVID E9 MUST BE TURNED OFF AVOID ALL CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL CONTACTS CONDUCTORS AND COMPONENTS ALWAYS USE NON CONDUCTIVE HANDLES DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF ESD SENSITIVE PARTS ALL PARTS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL FOR STORING ENERGY MUST BE DISCHARGED OR ISOLATED BEFORE MAKING CONTACT WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PART...

Page 640: ...osen the BEP Cover s fixing screw s On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover away from the BEP c Set the BEP Cover aside 6 For easier access to the DVR Board remove the Hard Disk...

Page 641: ...g screws from the connector at top of the DVR The flex between the Graphics Adapter and the DVR board uses finger screws The flex from the motherboard is fixed with Hex screws 3 Disconnect the audio jack and the two flex cables where they attach to the DVR Board 4 Disconnect the DVR to SATA Cable 5 Remove the fixing screw for the DVR board 6 Pull out the DVR board Next 8 14 2 5 BEP6 Digital Video ...

Page 642: ...igital Video Recorder from a BEP5 1 Locate the DVR Board behind the HDD 2 Disconnect the audio jack SATA DVI flex cables where they attach to the DVR Board 3 Remove the DVR Board from the motherboard slot Next 8 14 2 6 BEP5 Digital Video Recorder installation procedure on page 8 311 Figure 8 255 DVR Board BEP5 Figure 8 256 DVR Cables BEP5 DVR Board BEP HDD HINGES HDD REMOVED SATA AUDIO JACK DVI FL...

Page 643: ...w DVR Board in the correct slot 2 Insert and fasten the fixing screw 3 Plug in the cables you removed earlier Connections if the DVR Board is installed in a VIVID E9 with 4D Connections if the DVR Board is installed in a VIVID E9 with 2D 4 Install the fixing screws you removed earlier 5 Install the HDD DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil DVI Samtech Flex DVR Audio CN SATA5 CN SATA3 DVR TO SATA DVI Samtech Fle...

Page 644: ...sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover On older BEP5 there is one finger screw at the top of the BEP Cover 7 Install th...

Page 645: ...n these steps a Insert the base of the BEP Cover inside the base of the BEP Be sure the bottom lip of the BEP Cover rests inside the BEP b Tilt the top of the BEP Cover toward the VIVID E9 c Install the fixing screw s for the BEP Cover On BEP6 there are two finger screws on the top of the BEP Cover On newer BEP5 there are three Phillips screws one on the top and one on each side of the BEP Cover O...

Page 646: ...NING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTAGE GREATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL...

Page 647: ...White Digital Graphic Printer 1 Slide the printer into the printer bracket until the face is flush with the VIVID E9 2 Tighten the printer bracket wing nut to secure the printer in the printer bracket 3 Connect the cables to the back of the printer 4 Replace the Left Side Cover 8 14 4 USB Flash Card replacement 8 14 4 1 Removing the USB Flash Card 1 Select Utility Eject The Eject device menu is di...

Page 648: ...el please refer to the Printer Driver Installation Manual Direction Number GA294652 revision 3 or higher for installation and setup instructions General installation instructions 1 Connect the USB cable to the printer and to the USB port on VIVID E9 s Rear Panel 2 Connect the power cable to the printer and to the mains power outlet 3 Switch on the power on the printer WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTRO...

Page 649: ...ct the GFI PCIe Cable from the top of the BEP 2 Disconnect the GFI PCIe Cable from the GFI board as described in these steps a On the Front End Card Rack remove the cover for the GFI PCIe Cable connector b Unplug the GFI PCIe Cable 3 Loosen the GFI PCIe Cable from the cable clip 4 Remove the GFI PCIe Cable 8 14 6 3 Install the GFI PCIe Cable Follow these steps to install the GFI PCIe Cable 1 Route...

Page 650: ... end of the GFI PCIe Cable to the connector on top of the BEP Ensure that the GFI PCIe Cable is kept out of the drawed box area in Figure 8 259 as there is a risk that the Z Mechanism damage the cable 5 Install the Left Side Cover and the Right side Cover Figure 8 259 Keep cables out of the marked area 1 GFI PCIe Cable at top of BEP 2 Keep cables out of the marked area 1 2 ...

Page 651: ...VIVID E9 9 6 9 6 Covers and Bumpers 9 15 9 7 Top Console parts 9 18 9 8 XYZ parts 9 50 9 9 Main Console parts 9 52 9 10 Casters Wheels parts 9 54 9 11 Front End Processor FEP Card Rack parts 9 56 9 12 Back End Processor BEP Spare Parts 9 60 9 13 Main Power Supply 9 64 9 14 I O modules 9 65 9 15 Peripherals for VIVID E9 9 66 9 16 Mains Power Cables VIVID E9 9 71 9 17 Internal Cables VIVID E9 9 72 9...

Page 652: ... 2 Definitions of Left Right Front and Back Section 9 2 Definitions of Left Right Front and Back The Figure below illustrates what is Left Right Front and Rear or Back of the VIVID E9 Figure 9 1 Definition of Left Right Front and Back of VIVID E9 RIGHT SIDE REAR BACK LEFT SIDE FRONT ...

Page 653: ...age 5 52 OP OPERATOR PANEL BEPY3 SEE DESCRIPTION IN 5 9 2 Introduction on page 5 52 PC PERSONAL COMPUTER Back End Processor BEP5 SEE DESCRIPTION IN 5 9 2 Introduction on page 5 52 PCIe PCI Express BEP6 SEE DESCRIPTION IN 5 9 2 Introduction on page 5 52 PS POWER SUPPLY CRU CUSTOMER REPLACEABLE UNIT PWA PRINTED WIRE ASSEMBLY CTRL CONTROL PWR POWER CW CONTINUOS DOPPLER QTY QUANTITY USED PER VIVID E9 ...

Page 654: ...her v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x v112 1 x v112 1 x GA200890 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA000950 Vivid E9 100 230V 4D Expert Option 19 LCD GB200001 BEP6 w 4D v104 3 4 or higher v112 0 7 or higher v112 1 x GB200003 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia Quadro 2000D v104 3 3 or higher v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GA200890 BEP w 4D Nvidia v104 3 x v112 0 x or higher v112 1 x GB000040 Vivid E9 100 ...

Page 655: ...200800 BEP5 w 4D Nvidia v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000830 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 17 LCD GA200804 VE9 Card Rack Complete w MLA4 GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA000835 VIVID E9 100 230V 2D 19 LCD GB200002 BEP6 wo 4D v104 3 x v110 1 12 v112 1 x GA200900 or GA200805 BEP5 wo 4D v110 1 x v104 2 x v104 1 x v110 0 x GA00...

Page 656: ...AME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU System Software 1 VIVID E9 SYSTEM SOFTWARE BEP6 GB200015 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD GHOST FOR BEP6 LATEST SYSTEM SOFTWARE 2012 SEP 14 v104 3 4 1 N Y 2 VIVID E9 SYSTEM SOFTWARE BEP5 GA200895 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD GHOST LATEST SYSTEM SOFTWARE 2012 AUG 17 v104 3 3 1 N N 3 Vivid E9 System software Spare Part GA200895 04 Vivid E9 System software ...

Page 657: ... 1 N Y 9 VIVID E9 APPLICATION SOFTWARE v 112 1 0 GA200965 10 APPLICATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION CD v 112 1 0 The CD is labeled Version 112 Revision 1 0 1 N Y 10 VIVID E9 APPLICATION SOFTWARE v 112 0 7 GA200965 09 APPLICATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION CD v 112 0 7 The CD is labeled Version 112 Revision 0 7 1 N Y 11 VIVID E9 APPLICATION SOFTWARE v 112 0 6 GA200965 08 APPLICATION SOFTWARE INSTALLATION CD ...

Page 658: ...Patch GA200973 02 FOR THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM SOFTWARE VERSION v104 3 x The patches must be installed after the installation of system software and application software This security patch CD includes the following patches MS11 006 Vulnerability in Windows Shell Graphics Processing Could Allow Remote Code Execution MS11 020 Vulnerability in SMB Server Could Allow Remote Code Execution MS11 042 Vulner...

Page 659: ...tem software v 104 3 2 for BEPY1 BEP5 1 N Y 4 GA200895 02 Vivid E9 System SW 104 3 1 for BEPY1 BEP5 1 N Y 5 GA200895 01 Vivid E9 System SW 104 3 0 for BEPY1 BEP5 1 N Y 6 VIVID E9 SYSTEM SOFTWARE GA200840 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION DVD GHOST Was delivered with new VIVID E9s Latest version 2011 SEP 02 v104 2 0 1 N N 7 GA200840 02 Service Part VIVID E9 System software v 104 2 0 1 N Y 8 VIVID E9 SYS...

Page 660: ...110 1 1 1 N Y 4 GA200956 03 Service Part Application software v 110 1 3 1 N Y 5 GA200956 04 Service Part Application software v 110 1 4 1 N Y 6 GA200956 05 Service Part Application software v 110 1 5 1 N Y 7 GA200956 06 Service Part Application software v 110 1 7 1 N Y 8 GA200956 07 Service Part Application software v 110 1 8 1 N Y 9 GA200956 08 Service Part Application software v 110 1 10 1 N Y 1...

Page 661: ...tem software and application software This security patch CD includes the following patches MS11 006 Vulnerability in Windows Shell Graphics Processing Could Allow Remote Code Execution MS11 019 Vulnerabilities in SMB Client Could Allow Remote Code Execution MS11 020 Vulnerability in SMB Server Could Allow Remote Code Execution Updated 2012MAY04 1 N Y Vivid E9 and EchoPAC PC MS Security Patch GA20...

Page 662: ... BEP5 BIOS Load CD Release version A563E121 GA200725 FOR VIVID E9 BEP5 1 N Y 2 SET SERIAL NUMBER GA200649 Latest version per 2010 11 03 v1 2 GA200649 REV 3 1 N Y 3 PRINTER INSTALLER GA200652 Printer Driver Installer CD Latest version per 2012AUG07 GA200652 REV 5 For Installation instructions see Printer Driver Installation Manual Direction Number GA294652 use the latest revision 1 N Y 4 Firmware f...

Page 663: ...9 System Software v 104 0 2 1 N Y Application Software 5 VIVID E9 APPLICATION SOFTWARE GA200355 Application software installation CD Was delivered with new VIVID E9s Application software version v108 1 12 was used on FMI 76114 v108 1 13 introduced for use with XP Service Pack 3 See below for latest patch es Updated 2011 SEP 02 1 N N 6 GA200355 01 Service Part Application software v 108 0 0 1 N Y 7...

Page 664: ...are WINDOWS PATCHES INCLUDED MS08 067 MS09 001 MS09 22 MS10 007 MS10 020 KB967715 MS10 046 MS10 054 Updated 2011 SEP 01 1 N Y 16 Patch for 108 1 6 GA200814 01 Install this patch after application software v108 1 6 has been installed Updates the VIVID E9 to software v108 1 8 1 N N Miscellaneous Software 17 BEP5 BIOS Load CD Release version A563E121 GA200725 FOR VIVID E9 BEP5 1 N Y 18 SET SERIAL NUM...

Page 665: ...s Table 9 12 COVERS VIVID E9 sheet 1 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 COVER FRONT GA307022 FRONT COVER 1 N Y 2 PLATE CONNECTORS W GUIDE GA307056 1 N Y 3 COVER LEFT ASM GA200107 LEFT SIDE COVER ASSEMBLY 1 N Y 4 COVER RIGHT ASM GA200108 RIGHT SIDE COVER ASSEMBLY 1 N Y 5 COVER TOP GA307023 TOP COVER 1 N Y ...

Page 666: ...Y 7 Door I O PANEL GA307046 1 N Y 8 CABLE HOOK GA307047 2 N Y 9 BUMPER REAR GA307008 1 N Y 10 COVER FILTER GA307515 FILTER COVER 1 TBD Y 11 BUMPER FOOTREST ASSY GA200005 FRONT BUMPER FOOTREST 1 N Y 12 HANDLE REAR GA307029 1 N Y 13 BUMPER LEFT GA307006 1 N Y Table 9 12 COVERS VIVID E9 cont d sheet 2 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 667: ...EFT TOP METAL FINISH GA307233 1 N Y 18 HANDLE RIGHT TOP METAL FINISH GA307235 1 N Y 19 BULKHEAD COVER GA307061 1 N Y 20 BW PRINTER FILLER BOX 5309088 USED ON UNITS WITHOUT INTERNAL B W PRINTER 1 N Y 21 DRIVE BAY STORAGE BOX 5267580 2 USED ON UNITS WITHOUT DVR OPTION 1 N Y 22 PRINTER TRAY FOR BEP 6 5174885 2 1 N Y Table 9 12 COVERS VIVID E9 cont d sheet 3 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION...

Page 668: ... 9 7 1 LCD Monitor parts Table 9 13 LCD parts ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 17 INCH MONITOR AND PARTS 1 LCD MONITOR 17 GA200550 17 INCH LCD MONITOR 1 N Y 2 LCD ARM FOR 17 LCD 5199125 1 N Y 19 INCH MONITOR AND PARTS 3 LCD MONITOR 19 5198551 19 Inch LCD Monitor for VIVID E9 1 N Y 4 LCD ARM FOR 19 LCD 5183750 1 N Y ...

Page 669: ...RIPTION QTY CRU FRU OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 5 1 OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 5 GB200030 This is the latest version of the Operator Panel Lower On this OP the Top Locking Plate including the Rubber Dust Filtering Ring can be detached from outer side of the Operator Panel for cleaning purposes do not need to get inside the panel This part is backward compatible 1 N N 2 Operator Panel Lower Bezel GB200024 For O...

Page 670: ...outer side of the Operator Panel for cleaning purposes do not need to get inside the panel The new Laser Trackball Assembly can be used with old versions of Operator Panel Upper 1 N N Table 9 14 OP 5 parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU Dust Gasket Rubber Type for older Lower Panels with small trackball opening in the bezel To be used together with the compl...

Page 671: ...ER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU OPERATOR PANEL UPPER 4 1 OPERATOR PANEL UPPER 4 GA200865 Replaces GA200822 GA200720 and GA200365 1 N Y 2 UPPER BEZEL GA200437 This part is compatible with all OP versions 1 N Y 3 Frame w LCD and TouchScreen 5207000 39 1 N Y 4 Main board Video board Video Cable USB Aux Board 5207000 50 Replaces 5207000 40 when it becomes obsolete 1 N Y 5 5207000 40 ...

Page 672: ...rator Panel Cable Kit for Vivid E9 and Logiq E9 on page 9 34 1 N Y 7 USB Connector Board for Upper OP Panel 5207000 41 1 N Y OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 4 8 OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 4 GA200953 Phased out of manufacturing late October 2012 Use GB200030 as the replacement 1 N Y Table 9 15 OP 4 parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 673: ...ER 3 GA200822 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use GA200865 as the replacement 1 N Y 2 UPPER BEZEL GA200437 This part is compatible with all OP versions 1 N Y 3 Frame w LCD and TouchScreen GA200439 GA200439 is going obsolete When unavailable order GA200865 Operator Panel Upper 4 1 N Y 4 OPERATOR PANEL CABLE KIT GA200446 For kit details see 9 7 5 Operator Panel Cable Kit for Vivid E9 and Logiq E9 on page 9 34 If ...

Page 674: ... for 5207000 30 on OP 3 Install with the old video cable on OP 3 7 Main Ctrl Bd w USB Video Bd Cable 5207000 30 This part is going obsolete If unavailable you may use 5207000 40 as a replacement but install with the old video cable 1 N Y 8 USB Connector Board 2 GA200717 If unavailable you may use 5207000 40 and 5207000 41 but install with the old video cable 1 N Y Table 9 16 OP 3 parts cont d shee...

Page 675: ...E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 25 OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 3 9 OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 3 GA200823 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use GA200953 as the replacement 1 N Y Table 9 16 OP 3 parts cont d sheet 3 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 676: ...TION QTY CRU FRU OPERATOR PANEL UPPER 2 1 OPERATOR PANEL UPPER 2 GA200720 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use GA200865 as the replacement 1 N Y 2 UPPER BEZEL GA200437 This part is compatible with all OP versions 1 N Y 3 Main Controller Board With USB Board and Cables 2 GA200718 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use 5207000 40 as the replacement Note Use the old LCD cable 1 N Y 4 USB Connector Board 2 GA200717 1 N Y OPERATOR PA...

Page 677: ... E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 27 5 OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 2 GA200755 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use GA200953 or GB200030 as the replacement 1 N Y Table 9 17 OP 2 specific parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 678: ...OPERATOR PANEL UPPER GA200365 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use GA200865 as the replacement 1 N Y 2 UPPER BEZEL GA200437 This part is compatible with all OP versions 1 N Y 3 OPERATOR PANEL LOWER 1 GA200394 1 N Y 4 Main Controller Board With USB Board and Cables GA200448 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use 5207000 40 as the replacement Note Use the old LCD cable NOTE GA200448 is compatible with the USB Connector Board model...

Page 679: ...9 29 5 USB Connector Board 2 GA200717 NOTE This board is compatible with both GA200448 and GA200718 1 N Y 6 USB Connector Board GA200441 NOTE This board is only compatible with GA200442 1 N Y Table 9 18 OP 1 specific parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 680: ...B Aux Board 5207000 50 Replaces 5207000 40 when it becomes obsolete 1 N Y 2 Main board Video board Video Cable USB Aux Board 5207000 40 For OP 4 May be used as a replacement for 5207000 30 on OP 3 Install with the old video cable on OP 3 1 N Y 3 USB Connector Board for Upper OP Panel 5207000 41 1 N Y 4 Main Ctrl Bd w USB Video Bd Cable 5207000 30 For OP 3 This part is going obsolete If unavailable...

Page 681: ...ard and Cables GA200448 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Use 5207000 40 as the replacement Note Use the old LCD cable NOTE GA200448 is compatible with the USB Connector Board models GA200441 and GA200717 1 N Y 7 USB Connector Board 2 GA200717 NOTE This board is compatible with both GA200448 and GA200718 1 N Y 8 USB Connector Board GA200441 NOTE This board is only compatible with GA200442 1 N Y Table 9 19 Top Con...

Page 682: ...D WITH CABLE GA200442 1 N Y PCB FRUs on the Lower OP 10 Lower Switch Board with Elastomer GA200440 1 N Y 11 Encoder Board GA200443 1 N Y 12 Encoder w Push Button 066E2306 Replaces GA200447 5 N Y 13 BUTTON IF BOARD ASSY GA200286 1 N Y Table 9 19 Top Console PCBs cont d sheet 3 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 683: ...ace Trackball Switch Cable for connecting the switches located around the Trackball to the USB interface Screws washers for fixing the Trackball to the Lower Operator Panel 1 N Y 2 Dust Gasket and Fixing Ring for Laser Trackball Vivid E9 GA200971 For OP 2 and later NOTE THESE PARTS ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE INDUCTIVE TRACKBALL USED ON OP 1 1 N Y 3 INDUCTIVE TRACKBALL GA200682 For OP 1 GA200682 r...

Page 684: ...ble For connection between Trackball and Main Controller Board Trackball Switch Cable First version For connecting the switches located around the Trackball to the USB interface Trackball Switch Cable Second Version For connecting the switches located around the Trackball to the USB interface USB Video Board Flex Cable New type CMO display For connection between the USB Video Board and the LCD Dis...

Page 685: ...anel Cable Kit for Vivid E9 and Logiq E9 cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU Trackball USB Cable For connection between Trackball and Main Controller Board USB Video Board Flex Cable Old For connection between the USB Video Board and the LCD Display Connectors in same direction HV Inverter Cable For connection between the HV Inverter Board and the Main Controller...

Page 686: ...ID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 36 Section 9 7 Top Console parts 9 7 6 Button Kits and Knobs Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs sheet 1 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 Button Kit Danish 066E3230 1 N Y 2 Button Kit Dutch 066E3231 1 N Y ...

Page 687: ...N 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 37 3 Button Kit Universal English 066E3221 1 N Y 4 Button Kit Finnish 066E3229 1 N Y Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs cont d sheet 2 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 688: ...SION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 38 Section 9 7 Top Console parts 5 Button Kit French 066E3222 1 N Y 6 Button Kit German 066E3223 1 N Y Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs cont d sheet 3 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 689: ...SION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 39 7 Button Kit Spanish 066E3224 1 N Y 8 Button Kit Portuguese 066E3225 1 N Y Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs cont d sheet 4 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 690: ...ON 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 40 Section 9 7 Top Console parts 9 Button Kit Italian 066E3226 1 N Y 10 Button Kit Swedish 066E3227 1 N Y Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs cont d sheet 5 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 691: ...SY GA200270 SWITCHES ASSY FOR XY CONTROL This ASSY includes the following parts Up Down Button Board GA200285 Button XY Break Button Z Lift Bracket Buttons 2 N Y 13 UP DOWN BUTTON BOARD GA200285 Circuit Board without Plastic Front Cover and Buttons 2 N Y Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs cont d sheet 6 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 692: ...EVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 42 Section 9 7 Top Console parts 14 Knobs Encoders and Slidepots GA200445 KNOB KIT FOR OP 1 Y Y Table 9 22 Button Kits and Knobs cont d sheet 7 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 693: ...an be used on all VIVID E9 systems Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts sheet 1 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 FRAME UI UPPER ASM GA200392 1 N Y 2 USB Socket Cover 5207000 54 1 N Y 3 LEFT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 5307245 Options holder 1 N Y 4 RIGHT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY 5307243 Options holder 1 N Y 5 TRAY UNIT ASSEMBLY 5307236 2 N Y ...

Page 694: ...BEZEL GA200437 1 N Y 7 LCD MOUNT LOCK ASSY GA200302 1 N Y 8 Frame w LCD and TouchScreen 5207000 39 1 N Y 9 Frame w LCD and TouchScreen GA200439 GA200439 is going obsolete 10 LOWER BEZEL GA200438 1 N Y Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts cont d sheet 2 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 695: ...30 2 N Y 12 Cable A N Keyboard USB 12V GA200368 1 N Y 13 CABLE HOOK TWIN GA307069 2 N Y 14 PROBEHOLDER INSERT 3D GA307073 PROBEHOLDER SOFTINSERT FOR 3D 4D PROBES 1 Y Y 15 PROBEHOLDER INSERT STD GA307072 PROBEHOLDER INSERT FOR STANDARD PROBES 1 Y Y Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts cont d sheet 3 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 696: ...DOPPLER PEDOF PROBE 1 Y Y 17 GEL CUP GA307239 1 Y Y 18 SOFT INSERT GEL CUP GA307676 1 Y Y 19 A N KEYBOARD ENCLOSURE GA200683 The A N Keyboard Encloser includes these parts A N Keyboard Enclosure Bottom A N Keyboard Enclosure Top Cable GND A N keyboard 1 N Y Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts cont d sheet 4 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 697: ...1 A N Keyboard Danish 066E3210 1 N Y 22 A N Keyboard Dutch 066E3211 1 N Y 23 A N Keyboard French 066E3202 1 N Y 24 A N Keyboard German 066E3203 1 N Y 25 A N Keyboard Spanish 066E3204 1 N Y 26 A N Keyboard Italian 066E3206 1 N Y Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts cont d sheet 5 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 698: ...rd Norwegian 066E3208 1 N Y 29 WAGON AN DRAWER SHEET MET ASSY GA200304 1 N Y 30 J RAIL LINING J RAIL ASSY GA200544 2 N Y 31 NON MAGNETIC TOUCH LATCH PR 21P 080X1424 2 N Y 32 SPRING AN LATCH GA307643 1 N Y 33 LOWER FRAME ASSEMBLY GA200358 1 N Y Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts cont d sheet 6 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 699: ...plete GA200450 BOTTOM VIEW 1 N Y 35 PALM REST ASSY GA200605 PALM REST PALM REST PAD 2 1 N Y 36 PALM REST GA307063 PALM REST PAD 1 N Y 37 Bulkhead Plate Extended GA307059 1 N Y 38 BRACKET LOCK HDMI 2 GA307624 1 N Y Table 9 23 Other Common Top Console parts cont d sheet 7 of 7 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 700: ...UMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 XY MECHANISM GA200946 FROG LEG Replaces GA200036 NOTE This part requires that either the XYZ controller Part Number GA200795 or Part number GA200994 is installed 1 N Y 2 XY MECHANISM GA200036 FROG LEG 1 N Y 3 Z MECHANISM GA200039 1 N Y 4 Z Mech Sub Assy GA200134 1 N Y 5 DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY GA200750 1 N Y 6 DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY GA200177 1 N Y ...

Page 701: ...nd GA200644 1 N Y 8 XYZ CONTROL ASM GA200795 Replaces GA200644 Can be used with both GA200036 and GA200946 1 N Y 9 XYZ CONTROL ASM GA200644 1 N Y 10 XY BRAKE ASSY GA200952 Replaces GA200535 NOTE This part requires that the new XYZ controller Part Number GA200795 is installed 4 N Y 11 XY BRAKE ASSY GA200535 Can be used with both GA200036 and GA200946 4 N Y 12 PARK LOCK GA200161 XY Park Lock 1 N 1 T...

Page 702: ...heels parts on page 9 54 4 COVERS SEE Section 9 6 Covers and Bumpers on page 9 15 5 BULKHEAD BOARD ASSY GA200290 1 N Y 6 Fan for VE9 cardcage 098A0093 Spare part for VE9 Fan Tray Fan Drawer 1 N Y 7 FAN DRAWER ASSY COMPLETE GB200014 Replaces GA200829 and 5141940 Requires Application Software v110 1 11 or later or v112 0 or later Ferrite included 1 N Y 8 FAN DRAWER INCL FERRITE GA200829 OBSOLETE OBS...

Page 703: ... HANDLE LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF VIVID E9 5316340 2 REPLACES GA200828 1 N Y GA200828 DUST FILTER WITH NYLON STIP LOCATED AT BOTTOM OF VIVID E9 GA200828 REPLACES 5316340 5316340 11 FILTER DUST REAR GA307351 1 Y Y 12 CABLE MAIN Top Console 5272357 1 N Y Table 9 25 Main Console parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 704: ...et 1 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 Wheel cap for VE9 casters GA200245 and GA200246 GA307888 Replacement CAP with snap on locks 8 N Y 2 CASTERS FRONT W BRAKE AND LOCK GA200245 FRONT CASTERS FRONT WHEELS 2 N Y 3 CASTERS REAR SVIWEL AND BRAKE GA200246 REAR CASTERS REAR WHEELS 2 N Y 4 PEDAL MECHANISM ASSEMBLY GA200070 1 N Y 5 PEDAL BRAKE GA307052 1 N Y ...

Page 705: ...68 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 55 6 PEDAL RELEASE GA307053 1 N Y 7 PEDAL DIR LOCK GA307054 1 N Y Table 9 26 Casters Wheels parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 706: ...ELS WITHOUT ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 4 GRX64 GA200300 RECEIVER BOARD 64 CHANNELS WITHOUT ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 5 GRX128 WITH CW GB200020 NOTE This board will be phased into production and phased in as a Service Part when GA200105 becomes unavailable RECEIVER BOARD 128 CHANNELS WITH ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 6 GRX128 WITH CW GA200105 RECEIVER BOARD 128 CHANNELS WITH ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 7 GTX TLP192 GA200726...

Page 707: ...9 Renewal parts 9 57 12 DRX3 BOARD MLA4 VERSION 5301040 4 DIGITAL RECEIVER BOARD 4 MLA DO NOT MIX WITH 5301040 5 3 N Y 13 GFI 2 5161631 RADIO FREQURENCY INTERFACE 1 N Y Table 9 27 Front End Processor Card Rack parts BT 11 BT 12 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 708: ...ER 1 N Y 4 GRX64 GA200300 RECEIVER BOARD 64 CHANNELS WITHOUT ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 5 GRX128 WITH CW GB200020 NOTE This board will be phased into production and phased in as a Service Part when GA200105 becomes unavailable RECEIVER BOARD 128 CHANNELS WITH ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 6 GRX128 WITH CW GA200105 RECEIVER BOARD 128 CHANNELS WITH ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 7 GTX TLP192 GA200726 TRANSMITTER BOARD 192 C...

Page 709: ...GA200300 becomes unavailable RECEIVER BOARD 64 CHANNELS WITHOUT ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 4 GRX64 GA200300 RECEIVER BOARD 64 CHANNELS WITHOUT ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 5 GRX128 WITH CW GB200020 NOTE This board will be phased in as a Service Part when GA200105 becomes unavailable RECEIVER BOARD 128 CHANNELS WITH ANALOG DOPPLER 1 N Y 6 GRX128 WITH CW GA200105 RECEIVER BOARD 128 CHANNELS WITH ANALOG DOPPLER 1 ...

Page 710: ...Spare Parts 9 60 9 12 3 BEP5 Spare Parts 9 62 9 12 2 BEP6 Spare Parts Table 9 30 BEP6 Spare Parts sheet 1 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 BEP6 0 WITHOUT 4D GB200002 BACK END PROCESSOR BEP6 without 4D System software requirement v104 3 4 or higher 1 N Y 2 BEP6 0 SIDE IO BOARD ASSEMBLY 5433408 1 1 N Y 3 BEP 6 0 POWER BOARD ASSEMBLY 5433408 20 1 N Y 4 BEP6 0 FRONTIO ASSEMBLY...

Page 711: ... E9s with BEP6 and 4D 1 N Y 8 BEP6 X Video ByPass Board 5433408 90 1 N Y 9 Intel HD Graphics and Intel Graphics Media Accelerator BEP6 N A Included on the BEP6 s Motherboard 1 N N 10 Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 OPTION May be used with all BEPs 1 N Y 11 All BEP6 cables See Section 9 17 6 1 BEP6 cables on page 9 79 Table 9 30 BEP6 Spare Parts cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM PART NAME PART ...

Page 712: ... Software requirement v108 0 0 and higher 1 N Y 4 GRAPHICS ADAPTER 066E0361 NVIDIA Quadro 2000D Used on VIVID E9s with 4D System Software requirement v104 3 3 or higher This card will be phased in as a replacement for 066E0360 when 066E0360 goes obsolete 1 N Y 066E0360 NVIDIA Quadro FX 1800 Graphics Adapter Used on VIVID E9s with 4D as replacement for 066E0339 5 PROLINK ADD card for PCI Express 16...

Page 713: ...nd GB200003 1 N Y 14 BEP FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY WITHOUT USB FREY 5301222 3 For 5145000 10 GA200800 and GA200805 1 N Y 15 RJ 45 Coupler and Flange Category 6 5176472 2 For all BEPs 1 N Y 16 BEP Power Supply Vivid E9 GA200876 For GA200890 GA200900 and GB200003 1 N Y 17 GE CUSTOM POWER SUPPLY BOARD 5393800 2 For 5145000 10 GA200800 and GA200805 1 N Y 18 Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 OPTI...

Page 714: ... Supply Table 9 32 Main Power Supply ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 Main power supply Vivid E9 GA200730 03 Replaces GA200730 1 N Y 2 Vivid E9 Main Power Supply GA200730 Replaces GA200004 Note A 2 minute wait might be necessary for a certain restart 1 N Y 3 POWER LV SUPPLY GA200004 MAIN PS FOR CARDIAC 1 N Y ...

Page 715: ...PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 PATIENT IO GB200010 Replaces GA200240 1 N Y 2 PATIENT IO GA200240 PATIENT IN OUT 1 N Y 3 BEP6 0 SIDE IO BOARD ASSEMBLY 5433408 1 I O ASSEMBLY For GB200001 and GB200002 1 N Y 4 BEP I O BOARD GA200878 I O ASSEMBLY For GA200890 GA200900 and GB200003 1 N Y 5 BEP I O BOARD 5321212 I O ASSEMBLY For GA200800 and GA200805 1 N Y ...

Page 716: ... 066E0700 4 DVD Drive SATA LG GH20NS15 066E0700 5 DVD Interface Board 5301204 1 N Y Table 9 35 Printer B W Internal ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 B W PRINTER GA100980 066E2961 MITSUBISHI Digital Monochrome Printer P95DE 1 N Y 2 B W PRINTER FC100942 066E0111 SONY UP D897SYN DIGITAL GRAPHIC B W PRINTER USB 1 N Y 3 VIDEO PAPER UPP110HD BOX OF 10 ROLLS CAT E14731GE 1 N N Table 9...

Page 717: ...D DIGITAL GRAPHIC COLOR PRINTER USB EXTERNAL REPLACES SONY UP D23MD 1 Y Y 6 COLOR VIDEO PRINTER UP D23MD FOR VIVID E PRODUCTS GA100677 066E2958 OBSOLETE SONY UP D23MD DIGITAL GRAPHIC COLOR PRINTER USB EXTERNAL OBSOLETE FROM FACTORY 1 Y Y 7 CABLE POWER 1XX VAC 070C3561 1 Y Y 8 MAINS CABLE 3P HP PN DM293A ABJ JAP 070C1502 9 MAINS CABLE 3P HP PN DM293A AB2 CHI 070C1501 10 COLOR PAPER UPC21L SONY CAT ...

Page 718: ...066E0429 5 HP OFFICEJET PRO K5400 KIT SPARE PART HP OfficeJet Pro K5400dn EQ100158 066E0426 Replaced by EY100153 066E0427 1 Y Y 6 COLOR LASER PRINTER 100 127 VAC ASSEMBLY SPARE PART 066E0418 OBSOLETE OBSOLETE Replaced by EY100149 EY100148 066E0428 066E0429 1 Y Y 7 COLOR LASER PRINTER 220 240 VAC ASSEMBLY SPARE PART EP100912 FD100237 066E0419 OBSOLETE Y Table 9 37 Printer Color Network cont d sheet...

Page 719: ...1 N Y 3 DVR Board See Section 9 12 Back End Processor BEP Spare Parts on page 9 60 Digital Video Disc Recorder Board is installed in BEP 4 Cable DVD Power FREY Cable K See 9 17 6 Back End Processor BEP cables on page 9 79 Table 9 39 USB Flash Card USB Drive ITEM Part Name Part Number Description QTY CRU FRU 1 USB Memory Key 8GB 066E0753 Kingston DataTraveler 410 1 Y Y 2 USB Memory Key 4GB 066E0754...

Page 720: ...allation manual and BIOS software for Vivid E9 066E0661 is the complete unit without installation manual and BIOS software For more information see Iomega Ultramax Desktop Hard Drive Installation Manual Direction Number EY194147 1 N N 2 USB Hard Drive 2TB with RAID1 NDUR 2T K 066E0661 1 N Y 3 Hard Drive 3 5 inch 1TB SATA for IOMEGA NDUR 1T HD 066E0662 3 5 inch 1 TBytes SATA HDD This is one of the ...

Page 721: ...81 4 H4000ZD 1 Y N 4 MAINS POWER CABLE JAPAN 5148381 2 H4000ZK 1 Y N 5 MAINS POWER CABLE NORTH AMERICA 5148381 H4000ZA 1 Y N 6 MAINS POWER CABLE AUSTRALIA 5323129 5148381 6 H4000ZG 5323129 replaces 5148381 6 1 Y N 7 MAINS POWER CABLE SWITZERLAND 5148381 7 H4000ZL 1 Y N 8 MAINS POWER CABLE DENMARK 5148381 8 H4000ZE 1 Y N 9 MAINS POWER CABLE ARGENTINA 5323275 5148381 9 H4000ZH 1 Y N 10 MAINS POWER C...

Page 722: ...GA200225 CABLE T XYZ CONTROLLER LOCK MOTOR 1 N Y 3 CABLE POWER CONTROLLER BEP FOR VIVID E9 GA200715 CABLE I J1 MAIN POWER SUPPLY XYZ CONTROLLER The upper version of the cable was introduced 2011 GA200715 replaces GA200291 1 N Y 4 CABLE SUB WOOFER GA200333 CABLE P J33 SUBWOOFER 1 N Y 5 CABLE PCI EXPRESS ON HDMI BEP CARDRACK FREY 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE GFI to BEP J5 1 N Y 6 CABLE BEP TO BACKPLANE...

Page 723: ...BLE DVD POWER FULLY SHIELDED 5266407 CABLE K J30 DVD 1 or DVD 2 2 N Y 12 CABLE DVD eSATA FULLY SHIELDED 5270048 CABLE M J2 DVD 1 or DVD 2 2 N Y 13 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY FREY 5272357 CABLE D FROGLEG CABLE DVI VIDEO BEP OP PANEL 48V POWER USB6 BEP OP PANEL AUDIO ON OFF USB5 BEP OP PANEL UP DOWN BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES OP PANEL MOTOR BRAKE CONTROL 1 N Y Table 9 42 Cable Harness cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM ...

Page 724: ...ERATOR PANEL CABLE KIT GA200446 1 N Y 16 Cable A N Keyboard USB 12V GA200368 1 N Y 17 CABLE MAIN 5272357 CABLE D FROGLEG CABLE DVI VIDEO BEP OP PANEL 48V POWER USB6 BEP OP PANEL AUDIO ON OFF USB5 BEP OP PANEL UP DOWN BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES OP PANEL MOTOR BRAKE CONTROL 1 N Y 18 BRACKET LOCK BULKHEAD CONNECTORS GA307978 For mechanically securing the monitor HDMI cable and the monitor Power USB cable...

Page 725: ...HEAD 5248610 CABLE G USB short cable inside the UI J24 P7 J25 P8 2 N Y 21 CABLE XYZ UP DOWN GA200311 CABLE U UP DOWN LOCK BUTTONS 2 N Y 22 LCD Monitor Arm Cable Kit GA200668 Powerd_USB_cable_frey L9 19 LCD Video Cable 1 N Y 23 Powerd_USB_cable_frey 5196890 1 N Y 24 L9 19 LCD Video Cable 5256600 1 N Y Table 9 43 VIVID E9 Top Console cables sheet 2 of 2 cont d ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION ...

Page 726: ...200335 CABLE B XYZ CONTROLLER INNER FROG BRAKES 2 N Y 2 BRAKE ARM LEFT RIGHT CABLE GA200334 CABLE C INNER BRAKE OUTER BRAKE 2 N Y 3 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS SEE MAIN CABLE PART OF MAIN CABLE CABLE D3 XYZ CONTROLLER OP PANEL 1 N N 4 POWER CABLE BEP 48V GA200291 CABLE I J1 MAIN POWER SUPPLY XYZ CONTROLLER 1 N Y 5 CABLE USB A B HIGH SPEED 5194492 2 CABLE L USB CABLE J28 XYZ CONTROLLER 1 N Y 6 XY...

Page 727: ...bles ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 MAINS POWER CABLE See Section 9 16 Mains Power Cables VIVID E9 on page 9 71 2 CABLE USB A B HIGH SPEED 5194492 2 CABLE H J4 MAIN POWER SUPPLY 1 N Y 3 POWER CABLE BEP 48V GA200291 CABLE I J1 MAIN POWER SUPPLY XYZ CONTROLLER 1 N Y 4 POWER CABLE BW PRINTER 5194493 CABLE R MAIN POWER SUPPLY BW PRINTER 1 N Y ...

Page 728: ...es VIVID E9 9 17 5 Front End Processor FEP cables Table 9 46 Front End Processor FEP cables ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 PC2GFI CARD CABLE 5152290 PCI EXPRESS CABLE GFI to BEP J5 1 N Y 2 BEP BACKPLANE CABLE 5194491 CABLE N 1 N Y 3 Cable Doppler MBD Rot ADPT Box GA200536 1 N Y ...

Page 729: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 79 9 17 6 Back End Processor BEP cables 9 17 6 1 BEP6 cables Figure 9 2 BEP6 internal cables ...

Page 730: ... CABLE INCLUDED IN BEP6 0 FRONT IO ASSEMBLY WITHOUT USB PORT 5433408 41 1 N N 3 SATA HARD DRIVE CABLE COMES WITH HDD 5433408 50 1 N N 4 POWER HARD DRIVE CABLE COMES WITH HDD 5433408 50 1 N N 5 DVR TO SATA 5439827 2 USED ONLY IF DVR IS INSTALLED 1 N Y 6 SATA JUMPER INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408 80 USED IF DVR NOT INSTALLED 1 N N 7 PAT IO POWER AND USB INCLUDED IN CABLE KIT 5433408 80 1 N N 8 VIDEO ...

Page 731: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 9 Renewal parts 9 81 9 17 6 1 BEP6 cables cont d Figure 9 3 BEP6 External Cables ...

Page 732: ...ABLE B XYZ CONTROLLER INNER FROG BRAKES 2 N Y C FROG BRAKE ARM GA200334 CABLE C INNER BRAKE OUTER BRAKE 2 N Y D MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY 5272357 1 N Y D1 MAIN CABLE POWER AUDIO Part of 5272357 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 N N D2 MAIN CABLE VIDEO Part of 5272357 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 N N D3 MAIN CABLE XYZ SWITCH SIGNALS Part of 5272357 MAIN CABLE ASSEMBLY 1 N N D4 MAIN CABLE USB Part of 5272357 MAIN CABLE ASSE...

Page 733: ...ABLE USB BEP TO XYZ MOTOR CONTROLLER 5194492 6 USB CABLE XYZ CONTROLLER 1 N Y M CABLE DVD eSATA FULLY SHIELDED 5270048 SATA CABLE DVD CABLE M J2 DVD 2 J3 DVD 1 1 or 2 N Y N BEP6 TO GFI AND CARDRACK BACKPLANE CABLE 5391509 1 N Y P AUDIO CABLE SUBWOOFER GA200333 CABLE P J33 SUBWOOFER 1 N Y Q USB CABLE BW PRINTER 5194492 2 USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED 1 N Y Table 9 48 BEP6 External Cables and Harne...

Page 734: ...D E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 84 Section 9 17 Internal Cables VIVID E9 R POWER CABLE BW PRINTER 5194493 USED ONLY IF PRINTER INSTALLED 1 N Y Table 9 48 BEP6 External Cables and Harnesses cont d sheet 3 of 3 ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 735: ...OOFER GA200333 CABLE P J33 SUBWOOFER 1 N Y 2 POWER CABLE DVD 5266407 CABLE K J30 DVD 1 1 N Y 3 POWER CABLE DVD 5266407 CABLE K J29 DVD 2 1 N Y 4 MAIN CABLE POWER AUDIO SEE MAIN CABLE CABLE D1 PART OF MAIN CABLE J21 OP PANEL 1 N N 5 MAIN CABLE VIDEO SEE MAIN CABLE CABLE D2 PART OF MAIN CABLE J22 OP PANEL 1 N N BEP 1 PC2GFI CARD CABLE 5152290 CABLE J PCI EXPRESS CABLE J5 GFI 1 N Y 2 CABLE USB A B HI...

Page 736: ...Y 4 SATA CABLE DVD 1 5270048 CABLE M J2 DVD 1 1 N Y 5 CABLE BEP 6 5391509 1 N Y 6 CABLE USB BEP6 MAIN POWER SUPPLY 5194492 8 7 POWER CABLE BEP 48V 5194495 CABLE I J1 MAIN POWER SUPPLY XYZ CONTROLLER 1 N Y 8 BEP BACKPLANE CABLE 5194491 CABLE N 1 N Y Table 9 49 Back End Processor BEP cables sheet 2 of 4 cont d ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 737: ...S BEP FRONT PANEL ICHIRO 5193726 1 N Y 11 HARNESS BEP MOTHERBOARD IOBOARD YGGDRASIL IMPROVED AUDIO 5193725 3 1 N Y 12 Harness BEP Power Ygg GA200886 For GA200890 GA200900 and GB200003 1 N Y 13 HARNESS BEP POWER FREY 5165844 For GA200800 and GA200805 1 N Y Table 9 49 Back End Processor BEP cables sheet 3 of 4 cont d ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 738: ...VISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 88 Section 9 17 Internal Cables VIVID E9 14 Bracket Lock BEP Top Connectors GA200984 1 N Y Table 9 49 Back End Processor BEP cables sheet 4 of 4 cont d ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 739: ...ls Cables Table 9 50 Peripherals Cables ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 POWER CABLE BW PRINTER 5194493 CABLE R MAIN POWER SUPPLY BW PRINTER 1 N Y 2 POWER CABLE DVD 5266407 CABLE K J30 DVD 1 1 N Y 3 POWER CABLE DVD 5266407 CABLE K J29 DVD 2 1 N Y 4 SATA CABLE DVD 5270048 CABLE M J2 DVD 1 1 N Y ...

Page 740: ...TION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 90 Section 9 17 Internal Cables VIVID E9 5 SATA CABLE DVD 5270048 CABLE M J3 DVD 2 1 N Y Table 9 50 Peripherals Cables ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 741: ...PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 ECG CABLE SET FC200389 CONTENT CABLE CABLE ECG NICOLAY ADAPTER RCA MALE BNC FEMALE ADAPTER RCA FEMALE 6 ADAPTER RCA FEMALE 3 1 Y Y 1 CABLE ECG MARQ AHA AMERICA 164L0025 1 Y Y 2 CABLE ECG MARQ IEC EU AS 164L0026 1 Y Y 3 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ AHA AMERICA 164L0027 1 Y Y 4 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ IEC EU AS 164L0028 1 Y Y ...

Page 742: ...d E9 Nameplate Periwinkle Upper OP Panel GA314992 For Pro configuration N Y 3 Vivid E9 Nameplate Bronze Upper OP Panel GA314812 New for BT 11 N Y 4 Vivid E9 Nameplate Silver Upper OP Panel 5255315 BT09 N N Table 9 53 Physio TX Parts ITEM PART NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 PCG MICROPHONE MA 300HDS WITH ADAPTER GB200036 Replaces FD20036 1 Y Y 2 KIT HEART MICROPHONE MA300 AND ADAPTER FD2...

Page 743: ...ANCED OPTIONS 1 LVO CONTRAST IMAGING H45561MY 2 VASCULAR CONTRAST H45561MZ 3 AFI PRODUCTIVITY PACKAGE H45561GX 4 IMT H45561GY 5 Stress H45561NC 6 LV Mass Only H45561NA 7 4D Strain and LV Mass H45561NB 8 Auto 2D EF H45561ND 9 Rodent H45561NE 10 4V Enable H45561RJ 11 Advanced Qscan Imaging rev non J GA200891 12 Advanced Qscan Imaging rev J GA200892 OTHER 13 Tri pedal USB Footswitch H46732LF 5380960 ...

Page 744: ...E9 GA200618 Label DVR GA314384 Flex Cable DVI to SAMTEC Video Jumper 5428990 Cable DVR Audio BEP6 5435462 SATA Cable DVR to BEP6 MB 5439827 2 16 DVR option VIVID E9 For BEP5 GA200859 KIT INCLUDES Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 DVI Flex DVR jumper Yggdrasil BEP 5197217 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil BEP 5197216 Cable DVD Power fully shielded 5266407 Cable DVD eSATA fully shielded 5270048 DVD...

Page 745: ...3 DVR Option for Vivid E9 H45551NS GB200048 Includes parts for installing DVR into both BEP5 and BEP6 KIT INCLUDES Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 DVI Flex DVR jumper Yggdrasil BEP 5197217 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil BEP 5197216 Cable DVD Power fully shielded 5266407 Cable DVD eSATA fully shielded 5270048 DVD Assembly for VIVID E9 GA200618 Label DVR GA314384 Flex Cable DVI to SAMTEC Video...

Page 746: ... NETWORK OPTIONS 7 DICOM CONNECTIVITY PACKAGE H45551NR OTHER 8 DVR option VIVID E9 GA200859 KIT INCLUDES Digital Video Recorder Circuit Board 5135840 DVI Flex DVR jumper Yggdrasil BEP 5197217 DVI Flex Main Yggdrasil BEP 5197216 Cable DVD Power fully shielded 5266407 Cable DVD eSATA fully shielded 5270048 DVD Assembly for VIVID E9 GA200618 Label DVR GA314384 Installation procedure Digital Video Str...

Page 747: ...ech GA092904 1 N N 4 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual Danish GA092905 1 N N 5 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual Dutch GA092906 1 N N 6 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual English GA092907 1 N N 7 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual Estonian GA092908 1 N N 8 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual Finnish GA092909 1 N N 9 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual French GA092910 1 N N 10 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual German GA092911 1 N N 11 BT12 Vivid E9 User manua...

Page 748: ...ish GA092927 1 N N 29 BT12 Vivid E9 User manual Turkish GA092928 1 N N 30 BT12 Vivid E9 Reference manual English GA092929 REFERENCE MANUAL ENGLISH 1 N N 31 Remote Software Download and Installation manual GB094004 English 1 N N SERVICE MANUALS 1 VIVID E9 UNPACKING PACKING PROCEDURE ENGLISH GB050018 For carton box 1 N N 2 VIVID E9 UNPACKING PACKING PROCEDURE ENGLISH GA050318 For wooden box 1 N N 3 ...

Page 749: ...ER GUIDE DANISH GA092771 1 N N 10 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL JAPANESE GA092767 1 N N 11 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL CHINESE SIMPLIFIED GA092768 1 N N 12 VIVID E9 USER GUIDE POLISH GA092772 1 N N 13 VIVID E9 USER GUIDE FINNISH GA092773 1 N N 14 VIVID E9 USER GUIDE GREEK GA092774 1 N N 15 VIVID E9 USER GUIDE RUSSIAN GA092775 1 N N 16 VIVID E9 USER GUIDE DUTCH GA092776 1 N N 17 VIVID E9 USER GUIDE HUNGARIAN GA092...

Page 750: ...9 30 Remote Software Download and Installation manual GB094004 English 1 N N SERVICE MANUALS 1 VIVID E9 UNPACKING PACKING PROCEDURE ENGLISH GA050318 1 N N 2 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL ENGLISH GA091568 1 N N Table 9 58 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 BT 11 cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 751: ...PORTUGESE GA092409 1 N N 10 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL JAPANESE GA092410 1 N N 11 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL CHINESE SIMPLIFIED GA092411 1 N N 12 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL SWEDISH GA092412 1 N N 13 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL NORWEGIAN GA092413 1 N N 14 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL DANISH GA092414 1 N N 15 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL POLISH GA092415 1 N N 16 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL FINNISH GA092416 1 N N 17 VIVID E9 USER MANUAL GREEK GA09...

Page 752: ...ID E9 SERVICE MANUAL 9 102 Section 9 22 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 31 VIVID E9 USER REFER MANUAL GA092429 REFERENCEMANUAL ENGLISH 1 N N Table 9 59 Product Manuals for VIVID E9 BT 09 cont d sheet 2 of 2 ITEM NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU ...

Page 753: ...nish Dutch Estonia Finnish Greek Hungarian Indonesian Italian Japanese Korean Latvian Lithuanian Norwegian Polish Portugese Romanian Russian Slovenian Serbian Slovakian Spanish Swedish Turkish 1 N N Table 9 61 6T 6T RS 6Tc 6Tc RS 6Tv 9T 9T RS Probe Care Cards ITEM NAME PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY CRU FRU 1 TEE Probe Care Card English and Chinese KX192042 1 N N 2 TEE Probe Care Card French and Germ...

Page 754: ...er Manual Korean KX192084 1 N N 10 TEE Probes User Manual Serbian KX192240 1 N N 11 TEE Probes User Manual Bulgarian KX192241 1 N N 12 TEE probes User manual Croatian KX192410 1 N N 13 TEE PROBES USER MANUAL ENGLISH GERMAN FRENCH SIMPL CHINESE KZ192871 1 N N 14 TEE PROBES USER MANUAL ITALIAN KZ192874 1 N N 15 TEE PROBES USER MANUAL SPANISH KZ192875 1 N N 16 TEE PROBES USER MANUAL PORTUGUESE KZ1928...

Page 755: ...ies User manual Indonesian KX192663 1 N N 12 TEE Probes Accessories User manual Italian KX192323 1 N N 13 TEE Probes Accessories User manual Japanese KX192326 1 N N 14 TEE Probes Accessories User manual Korean KX192343 1 N N 15 TEE Probes Accessories User manual Latvian KX192339 1 N N 16 TEE Probes Accessories User manual Lithuanian KX192340 1 N N 17 TEE Probes Accessories User manual Norwegian KX...

Page 756: ...h KX192060 1 N N 7 IO Probes User manual Norwegian KX192061 1 N N 8 IO Probes User manual Danish KX192062 1 N N 9 IO Probes User manual Polish KX192063 1 N N 10 IO Probes User manual Finnish KX192064 1 N N 11 IO Probes User manual Greek KX192065 1 N N 12 IO Probes User manual Russian KX192066 1 N N 13 IO Probes User manual Dutch KX192067 1 N N 14 IO Probes User Manual Hungarian KX192085 1 N N 15 I...

Page 757: ...uire additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual 10 1 2 Purpose of this chapter This chapter describes Care Maintenance on the VIVID E9 and peripherals These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the VIVID E9 s performance Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task 10 1 3 Contents in th...

Page 758: ...ing must occur regularly The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken Testing results corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site Your GE service representative can help you with establishing performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance p...

Page 759: ...ou use your VIVID E9 for an average patient load 10 12 per day and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities NOTE If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load then it is recommended to increase the periodic maintenance frequencies Table 10 1 Customer Care Schedule sheet 1 of 2 Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly Per Facilit...

Page 760: ...geal Probe Leakage Current Checks also after corrective maintenance Surgical Probe Leakage Current Checks also after corrective maintenance Functional Checks also after corrective maintenance Table 10 1 Customer Care Schedule cont d sheet 2 of 2 Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly Per Facilities QA Program Notes ...

Page 761: ...91568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Chapter 10 Care maintenance 10 5 Section 10 4 Tools required NOTE A list of required tools for servicing the VIVID E9 please refer to 8 2 5 Tools needed for servicing VIVID E9 on page 8 4 ...

Page 762: ...cription 1 Ask Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment 2 Power up Turn the VIVID E9 power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed 3 Probes Verify that the VIVID E9 properly recognizes all probes 4 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch...

Page 763: ...ration PW and CW if available Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation 4 M Mode Verify basic M Mode operation Check the basic controls that affect this mode of operation 5 4D Mode Where applicable verify basic 4D Mode operation Check the basic controls that affect this mode of operation 6 Applicable Software Options Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as...

Page 764: ...e B W video page printer Clean heads and covers if necessary 3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer Clean heads and covers if necessary 4 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly Send an image to a DICOM device 5 ECG Verify basic operation with customer 6 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed Clean as necessary Table 10 5 Mains Cab...

Page 765: ...r cracks or damage 9 Op Panel Movement Verify ease of Operator Panel Operator Control Panel movement in all acceptable directions Ensure that it latches in position as required 10 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights 11 LCD Inspect the LCD Display for scratches and bad pixels Verify proper operation of Contrast and Brightness controls Confirm that the LCD...

Page 766: ...onnection receptacle Prior to cleaning turn OFF power to the VIVID E9 and disconnect the mains cable Table 10 7 VIVID E9 System General Cleaning sheet 1 of 3 Step Item Description 1 LCD Cabinet On a weekly basis moisten a soft non abrasive folded cloth or sponge with a mild general purpose non abrasive soap and water solution Do not use any solution containing abrasive powder or strong chemicals s...

Page 767: ... Clean the probe holders with warm water and a damp cloth to remove all traces of gel Soaking may be required to remove excess gel 7 System Cabinet On a weekly basis moisten a soft non abrasive folded cloth or spronge with a mild general purpose non abrasive soap and water solution Do not use any solution containing abrasive powder or strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline Squeeze excess liquid...

Page 768: ...in TEE Probe Care Card Avoid too much moisture on the cloth towel as this may cause cleaning fluids to flow along the cable and into the connector handle Always clean the cable from the connector towards the middle of the cable Hold the connector higher than the cable to avoid that cleaning fluids flows along the cable and into the connector Use the same technique when cleaning the cable from the ...

Page 769: ...ed November 2010 Please refer to the respective air filter replacement and cleaning instructions 8 8 2 Rear Filter and handle type Bottom Filter replacement on page 8 190 or 8 8 3 Rear Air Filter replacement on page 8 194 8 8 4 Bottom nylon strip Air Filter replacement on page 8 196 CAUTION Be sure to lock the wheels before cleaning the air filters to avoid injury by any unexpected movement of the...

Page 770: ...jury and equipment damage Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used Do a visual check of the probe pins and VIVID E9 sockets before plugging in a probe TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate...

Page 771: ...h a soft towel WARNING WARNING TO HELP PROTECT YOURSELF FROM BLOOD BORNE DISEASES WEAR APPROVED DISPOSABLE GLOVES THESE ARE MADE OF NITRILE DERIVED FROM VEGETABLE STARCH TO PREVENT ALLERGIC LATEX REACTIONS CAUTION Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe s warranty DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed for the probe Doing so could ...

Page 772: ... cleaner disinfectant as recommended in TEE Probe Care Card Avoid too much moisture on the cloth towel as this may cause cleaning fluids to flow along the cable and into the connector handle Always clean the cable from the connector towards the middle of the cable Hold the connector higher than the cable to avoid that cleaning fluids flows along the cable and into the connector Use the same techni...

Page 773: ...e a cloth or towel with only the smallest amont of cleaner disinfectant to wipe the connector 2 Avoid the connector pin area 3 Wipe off residual chemicals with a cloth or towel lightly moistened with clean water 4 Dry with clean cloth or towel 5 To remove residual chemicals follow the same prosedure as above but use a cloth or towel lightly moistened with clean water 6 Wipe off moisture with a clo...

Page 774: ... tissue sprayed with a recommended disinfectant Use additional precautions e g gloves and gown when decontaminating an infected probe High level disinfection High level Disinfection destroys vegetative bacteria lipid non lipid viruses fungi and depending highly on time of contact is effective on bacterial spores This is required for endocavity TV TR TE probes after contact with mucosal membrane 1 ...

Page 775: ...ich was in contact with the germicide according to the germicide manufacturer s instructions 4 Wipe dry with a soft towel or air dry the probe Figure 10 2 Probe immersion levels A 3V D 4V D M5S D 6S 12S D B 4C D C 9L D 11L D ML6 15 D D 2D P2D E 6D P6D 1 Fluid level 2 Contact face with patient environment WARNING WARNING CREUTZFELD JAKOB DISEASE NEUROLOGICAL USE ON PATIENTS WITH THIS DISEASE MUST B...

Page 776: ...ATER THAN 30 VOLTS 1 FOLLOW LOCK OUT TAG OUT PROCEDURES 2 TURN OFF THE BREAKER 3 UNPLUG THE VIVID E9 4 MAINTAIN CONTROL OF THE POWER PLUG 5 WAIT FOR AT LEAST 20 SECONDS FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE AS THERE ARE NO TEST POINTS TO VERIFY ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS ...

Page 777: ...quipment users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is suspected and at least every 12 months in accordance with local authorities and facility procedures Do not use the VIVID E9 or individual probes which fail any portion of the safety test WARNING WARNING ENERGY CONTROL AND POWER LOCKOUT FOR VIVID E9 WHEN SERVICING PARTS OF THE SYSTEM WHERE THERE IS EXPOSURE TO VOLTA...

Page 778: ...Y ISOLATION THE AMBER LIGHT ON THE OP PANEL ON OFF BUTTON WILL TURN OFF BEWARE THAT THE MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND BACK END PROCESSOR MAY BE ENERGIZED EVEN IF THE POWER IS TURNED OFF WHEN THE CORD IS STILL PLUGGED INTO THE AC OUTLET CAUTION Compare all safety test results with safety test results of previously performed safety tests e g last year etc In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety te...

Page 779: ... Parts or accessories that contact the patient to perform their function For ultrasound equipment this includes transducers and ECG leads Type BF Body Floating or non conductive ultrasound probes which are marked with the man in box BF symbol This includes all transducers Type CF Cardiac Floating or non conductive intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact and isolated ECG connections so mar...

Page 780: ...t the condition where the Neutral grounded supply conductor and the Grounding protective earth conductor are reversed If later tests indicate high leakage currents this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected 10 6 4 Grounding Continuity Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case The grou...

Page 781: ...asurements should be made under the test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 22 or Table 10 10 on page 10 22 as applicable Record the highest reading of current When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter This places the meter in the groundi...

Page 782: ...toring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 22 or Table 10 10 on page 10 22 as applicable For each combination the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition CAUTION Equipment damage possibility Never switch the Polarity when the ...

Page 783: ...on Figure 10 5 Test Circuit for Measuring Patient Lead Leakage POWER OUTLET H Black N White G Green Internal circuitry Insulating surface Polarity reversing switch Appliance power switch use both off and on positions Patient connected leads The connection is at service entrance or on the supply side of a separately derived system Building ground Grounding contact switch use in both open and closed...

Page 784: ... 6 7 Isolated Patient Lead Source Leakage Lead to Lead Select and test each of the ECG lead positions except ALL on the LEAD selector testing each to the power and ground condition combinations found in Table 10 9 on page 10 22 or Table 10 10 on page 10 22 as applicable Record the highest leakage current measured ...

Page 785: ...rrent is expected on each probe depending on its design Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured If no leakage current is detected check the configuration of the test equipment DANGER DO NOT USE THE PROBE IF THE INSULATING MATERIAL ...

Page 786: ...ill have some amount of leakage current dependent on its design Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement The ultrasound probe s imaging area is immersed in the Saline solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path NOTE The Saline solution is...

Page 787: ...highest current reading 9 Follow the test conditions and test limits described in Table 10 9 on page 10 22 or Table 10 10 on page 10 22 as applicable for every probe The test passes when all readings measure less than the stated limits Measurements should be recorded for each probe under the set of test conditions specified in Table 10 9 on page 10 22 or Table 10 10 on page 10 22 as applicable CAU...

Page 788: ...obe or the VIVID E9 NOTE Each probe will have some amount of leakage dependent on its design Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter cavity probe Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the...

Page 789: ...time 3 2 B back end processor bi directional signals 5 65 block diagram 5 54 cables 9 79 description 5 52 5 55 expansion slots on motherboard 5 62 fan replacement 8 276 front module replacement 8 273 front panel 5 55 input DC voltages 5 63 input signals 5 64 issue 7 6 CD DVD drive failures 7 6 image CD DVD not read 7 6 location 5 53 motherboard expansion slots 5 62 parts replacement 8 244 power su...

Page 790: ...ipherals 9 89 top console 9 74 XYZ controller 9 76 calibration touch screen 6 10 capture a screen image 7 12 card rack spare parts 9 56 care and maintenance 10 1 casters and brakes description 5 26 replacement 8 208 checks 4 51 control 4 17 spare parts 9 54 CD DVD drive failures 7 6 center speaker woofer replacement 8 205 certified electrical contractor statement for USA Only x change AE Title 3 4...

Page 791: ...edure warnings 1 32 data management moving all images 8 10 date and time adjustments 3 28 DC Offset calibration 6 11 definitions of Left Right Front and Back 8 5 department name 3 27 depth of ultrasound scanner 3 20 description 5 9 DHCP setup 3 44 diagnostics troubleshooting 7 1 DICOM adjust timeout for DICOM servers 6 17 DICOM option preparations requirements 2 12 job spooler 7 4 worksheet for DI...

Page 792: ...lter bottom cleaning 8 197 cleaning 10 13 rear filter cover replacement 8 51 foot rest bumper replacement 8 45 footswitch 3 36 5 97 forced power downpower forced power down 5 87 frame UI upper replacement 8 119 Frequently Asked Questions 7 2 front casters replacement 8 211 front cover replacement 8 47 Front End interface board GFI 5 47 front end alignment 6 11 when to do 6 11 alignment when to do ...

Page 793: ...onventions 1 6 important precautions language policy i initiate a request for service RFS 5 6 input and output I O modules description 5 88 InSite ExC definitions 5 8 description 5 4 icon 5 4 6 11 menu 5 4 requirements 2 12 status 5 5 installation 3 1 color video printer 3 49 warnings 3 2 intermittent problems 7 6 back end processor issue system halt errors 7 6 internal cables 9 72 internal periph...

Page 794: ... 5 24 parts replacement 8 190 spare parts 9 52 main controller board replacement 8 108 Main LCD and Touch Screen backlight adjustments 6 5 main power supply 5 77 block diagram 5 78 cables 9 77 parts replacement 8 292 spare parts 9 64 temperature control 5 79 mains cable inspection 10 8 mains power cables 9 71 mains voltage rating 3 21 maintenance how often 10 3 schedule 10 3 manpower when two pers...

Page 795: ... 7 Patient I O Physio 5 88 patient I O assembly replacement 8 295 pedal dir lock replacement 8 217 mechanism replacement 8 214 release replacement 8 217 pedals 4 17 periodic maintenance inspections 10 1 peripheral checks 10 8 peripherals cables 9 89 checks 4 47 connection 3 36 descriptions 5 96 external peripherals 3 36 external peripherals 3 37 internal 5 96 internal peripherals 3 36 replacement ...

Page 796: ...iver and transmitter signal control 5 31 Receiver Board 5 41 receiver board replacement 8 232 Receiver Board GRX 5 41 receiver signal path 5 30 receiving and unpacking the equipment 3 3 receiving the ultrasound scanner 3 5 recording important settings and parameters 4 19 8 11 recycling information packing materials 3 16 3 17 regulated medical waste 1 33 Relay Board RLY 5 38 relay board RLY replace...

Page 797: ...printer service 4 48 DHCP 3 44 digital vide recorder DVR 3 35 select offline mode 3 35 options 3 49 paperwork 3 50 reminders 3 2 warnings 3 2 shock and tilt indicators 3 4 shortcut keys 7 4 Shutdown 4 8 side bumpers replacement 8 44 side covers replacement 8 38 signal flow overview 5 11 site circuit breaker 2 5 log 4 52 power outlets 2 5 preparations 2 1 requirements desirable features 2 11 sneake...

Page 798: ...31 subsystem 5 29 transmitter board description 5 32 replacement 8 235 transportation damage x transportation box label carton box 3 9 wooden box 3 8 transporting the unit by vehicle 4 18 trouble image with logs 7 11 troubleshooting 7 15 gathering troubleshooting data 7 10 general recommendation 7 21 hints DRX 5 46 network connectivity 7 8 noise troubleshoting 7 21 system temperature is too high 7...

Page 799: ...are parts 9 54 when there s too much leakage current 10 32 when to load or reload the software 8 12 why do maintenance 10 2 width of ultrasound scanner 3 20 windows printer queues 4 48 woofer replacement 8 205 worksheet for DICOM network information 2 13 wrong key activated on the touch panel 7 7 X XD BUS front plane replacement 8 224 XD bus boards description 5 43 XY brake assembly replacement 8 ...

Page 800: ...GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION GA091568 REVISION 5 VIVID E9 SERVICE MANUAL Index 12 ...

Page 801: ......

Page 802: ... 2008 2010 2012 General Electric Company GE Medical Systems a General Electric Company going to market as GE Healthcare GE Vingmed Ultrasound AS P O Box 141 N 3191 HORTEN NORWAY www gehealthcare com ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for GA000100

ABB AutoLink Mounting Instructions preview
AutoLink
Brand: ABB Pages: 11
Landoll 2210 Operator'S Manual preview
2210
Brand: Landoll Pages: 52
JBSYSTEMS Light Premium Operation Manual preview
Premium
Brand: JBSYSTEMS Light Pages: 14
GE RGB1-G60-8 Use And Care Instructions preview
RGB1-G60-8
Brand: GE Pages: 2
GE Druck DPI 620 Genii Quick Start Manual preview
Druck DPI 620 Genii
Brand: GE Pages: 154
GE Arize Element Top Light Mounting Installation Manual preview
Arize Element Top Light
Brand: GE Pages: 2
Datex-Ohmeda Aestiva/5 Operation Manual preview
Aestiva/5
Brand: Datex-Ohmeda Pages: 104
Baker Hughes Druck DPI 620 Genii Instruction Manual preview
Druck DPI 620 Genii
Brand: Baker Hughes Pages: 166
Baker Hughes Druck DPI 620 Genii Safety And Quick Start Manual preview
Druck DPI 620 Genii
Brand: Baker Hughes Pages: 340
Federal Signal Corporation GH1 Instruction Sheet preview
GH1
Brand: Federal Signal Corporation Pages: 4
FASTERHOLT FM4400 User Manual & Spare Parts Catalogue preview
FM4400
Brand: FASTERHOLT Pages: 96
OHAUS Guardian 2000 Instruction Manual preview
Guardian 2000
Brand: OHAUS Pages: 84
Yamaha TG77 Owner'S Manual preview
TG77
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 139
Yamaha TG77 Midi Data Format preview
TG77
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 19
Yamaha 01V96i Quick Start Manual preview
01V96i
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 32
Yamaha LS9 Editor Short Cuts &Tips preview
LS9 Editor
Brand: Yamaha Pages: 5
Marani DPA360P User Manual preview
DPA360P
Brand: Marani Pages: 35
Osram ARCHISHAPE 2.0 Linear Instruction preview
ARCHISHAPE 2.0 Linear
Brand: Osram Pages: 7

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands